user manual • hv ready application manual · 2014-11-17 · market. to ensure maximum...
TRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
HV9000 AF DRIVES
• User Manual• HV Ready Application Manual
1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM Page 1
![Page 2: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
HV9000 USER MANUAL
CONTENTS
1 Safety ........................................................ 2
2 EU-directive .............................................. 4
3 Receiving .................................................. 5
4 Technical data ........................................... 7
5 Installation ............................................... 17
6 Wiring ..................................................... 23
7 HVMulti-line .................................................. 49
8 Startup .................................................... 61
9 Fault tracing ............................................ 64
10 Basic application .................................... 66
11 System parameter group 0 ..................... 73
12 HVReady application package ............... 75
13 Options ................................................... 77
A General ..............................................0-2
B Application selection .......................0-2
C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters ....................0-2
D Language selection .........................0-2
1 Standard Control Application ..........1-1
2 Local/Remote Control Application 2-1
3 Multi-step Speed Application ..........3-1
4 PI-control Application ......................4-1
5 Multi-purpose Application ...............5-1
6 Pump and fan control Application ..6-1
HV9000 HVReady APPLICATION MANUAL
![Page 3: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
HV9000 AF DRIVES
• User Manual
1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:19 AM Page 3
![Page 4: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual provides you with theinformation necessary to install, start-up andoperate a Cutler-Hammer HV9000 drive. Werecommend that you read this manualcarefully.
At minimum the following 10 steps of the
Quick Start Guide must be done duringinstallation and startup.
If any problem occurs, please call thetelephone number listed on the back of thismanual for assistance.
Quick Start Guide
1. Check the equipment receivedcompared to what you have ordered,see chapter 3.
2. Before doing any start-up actionscarefully read the safety instructions inchapter 1.
3. Before mechanical installation, checkthe minimum clearances around theunit and verify that ambient conditionswill meet the requirements of chapter5.2. and table 4.3-1a.
4. Check the size of the motor cable, theutility cable and the fuses. Verify thetightness of the cable connections.Review chapters 6.1.1, 6.1.2 and 6.1.2.
5. Follow the installation instructions, seechapter 6.1.4.
6 Control cable sizes and groundingsystem are explained in chapter 6.2.The signal configuration for the Basicapplication is in chapter 10.2.
Remember to connect the commonterminals CMA and CMB of the digitalinput groups (See figure 10.2.1).
7. For instructions on how to use theHVMulti-line panel see chapter 7.
8. The basic application has only 10parameters in addition to the motorrating plate data, the parameter andapplication package lock. All of thesehave default values. To ensure properoperation verify the nameplate data ofboth the motor and HV9000:
- nominal voltage of the motor- nominal frequency of the motor- nominal speed of the motor- nominal current of the motor- supply voltage
Parameters are explained in chapter10.4.
9. Follow the start-up instructions, seechapter 8.
10.Your Cutler-Hammer HV9000 is nowready for use.
If a different I/O configuration or differentoperational functions from the basicconfiguration are required, see chapter 12,HVReady application package for a moresuitable configuration. For a more detaileddescription, see the separate HVReady -application manual.
Cutler-Hammer is not responsible for the useof the HV9000 differently than noted in theseinstructions.
![Page 5: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1 (78)Contents
CONTENTS
1 Safety 2
1.1 Warnings ......................................... 21.2 Safety instructions .......................... 21.3 Grounding and ground fault
protection ....................................... 31.4 Running the motor .......................... 3
2 EU-directive ......................................... 4
2.1 CE-label .......................................... 42.2 EMC-directive ................................. 4
2.2.1 General .................................... 42.2.2 Technical criteria ...................... 42.2.3 HV9000 EMC-levels ................. 42.2.4 Manufacturer's Declaration of
Conformity ................................ 4
3 Receiving ............................................. 5
3.1 Catalog number .............................. 53.2 Storing ............................................. 63.3 Warranty .......................................... 6
4 Technical data ..................................... 7
4.1 General ............................................ 74.2 Power ratings .................................. 84.3 Specifications ............................... 15
5 Installation .......................................... 17
5.1 Ambient conditions ........................ 175.2 Cooling .......................................... 175.3 Mounting ........................................ 19
6 Wiring .............................................. 23
6.1 Power connections ....................... 266.1.1 Utility cable ............................. 266.1.2 Motor cable ............................ 266.1.3 Control cable.......................... 266.1.4 Installation instructions........... 29 6.1.4.1 Cable selection and
installation for UL listing .... 316.1.5 Cable and motor insulation
checks ................................... 466.2 Control connections ...................... 46
6.2.1 Control cables ........................ 466.2.2 Galvanic isolation barriers ...... 466.2.3 Digital input function inversion.48
7 HVMulti-line panel ............................. 49
7.1 Introduction .................................... 497.2 Panel operation ............................. 507.3 Monitoring menu............................ 517.4 Parameter group menu ................. 53
7.5 Reference menu ........................... 547.6 Programmable push-button menu 557.7 Active faults menu......................... 567.8 Fault history menu ........................ 587.9 Contrast menu .............................. 587.10 Active warning display ................. 597.11 Controlling motor from the panel . 60
7.11.1Control source change from I/O - terminals to the panel .... 60
7.11.2Control source change from panel to I/O ............................ 60
8 Start-up............................................... 61
8.1 Safety precautions ........................ 618.2 Sequence of operation .................. 61
9 Fault tracing ....................................... 64
10 Basic application ............................... 66
10.1 General ....................................... 6610.2 Control connections ................... 6610.3 Control signal logic ..................... 6710.4 Parameters, group 1 .................. 68
10.4.1 Descriptions ......................... 6910.5 Motor protection functions in
the Basic Application ................... 7210.5.1 Motor thermal protection ...... 7210.5.2 Motor stall warning ............... 72
11 System parameter group 0 ............... 73
11.1 Parameter table .......................... 7311.2 Description .................................. 73
12 "HVReady"- application package..... 75
12.1 Application selection.................... 7512.2 Standard Application ................... 7512.3 Local/Remote Application ........... 7512.4 Multi-step Speed Application ....... 7512.5 PI-control Application................... 7612.6 Multi-purpose Control App. .......... 7612.7 Pump and Fan Control App. ........ 76
13 Options .............................................. 77
13.1 Filters .......................................... 7713.2 Dynamic braking ......................... 7713.3 I/O-expander board ..................... 7713.4 Communications ......................... 7713.5 HVGraphic control panel ............. 7713.6 HVDrive ....................................... 7713.7 Control panel door mount kit ........ 7713.8 Protected chassis cable cover for
100-150 Hp open chassis units... 78
CUTLER-HAMMER HV9000 USERS MANUAL
![Page 6: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
Page 2 (78) HV9000
1 SAFETY
Safety
1
2
3
1.1 Warnings
ONLY A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN CAN CARRYOUT THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
56
4
Internal components and circuit boards (except the isolated I/Oterminals) are at utility potential when the HV9000 is connected tothe line. This voltage is extremely dangerous and may causedeath or severe injury if you come in contact with it.
When the HV9000 is connected to the utility, the motorconnections U(T1), V(T2), W(T3) and DC-link / brake resistorconnections -,+ are live even if the motor is not running.
The control I/O terminals are isolated from the line potentialbut the relay outputs and other I/O:s (if jumper X4 is in OFFposition see figure 6.2.2-1) may have dangerous external voltagesconnected even if the power is disconnected from the HV9000.
The HV9000 has a large capacitive leakage current.
An upstream disconnect/protection device is to be used as notedin the National Electric Code (NEC).
Only spare parts obtained from a Cutler-Hammer authorizeddistributor can be used.
12
34
65
7
1.2 Safety instructions
The HV9000 is meant only for fixed installation. Do not make any con-nections or measurements when the HV9000 is connected to theutility.
After disconnecting the utility, wait until the unit cooling fan stops andthe indicators on the control panel are extinguished (if no keypad ispresent, check the indicators in the cover). Wait 5 more minutesbefore doing any work on the HV9000 connections. Do not open thecover before this time has run out.
Do not make any voltage withstand or megger tests on any part ofthe HV9000.
Disconnect the motor cables from the HV9000 before meggering themotor cables.
Do not touch the IC-circuits on the circuit boards. Static voltagedischarge may destroy the components.
Before connecting to the utility make sure that the cover of theHV9000 is closed
Make sure that nothing but a three-phase motor is connected to themotor terminal, with the exception of factory recommended filters.
1
!
![Page 7: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3 (78)
2
3
Before running the motor, make sure that the motor is mountedproperly.
Maximum motor speed (frequency) should never be set to exceedthe motor's and driven machine's capability.
Before reversing the rotation of the motor shaft, make sure that thiscan be done safely.
1
Receiving
Warning Symbols
For your own safety, please pay specialattention to the instructions marked with thesewarning symbols:
= Dangerous voltage
= General warning
1.3 Grounding and ground faultprotection
The HV9000 must always be grounded with agrounding conductor connected to thegrounding terminal.
The HV9000's ground fault protection protectsonly the HV9000 if a ground fault occurs in themotor or in the motor cable.
Due to the high leakage current fault currentprotective devices do not necessarily operatecorrectly with drives. When using this type ofdevice its function should be tested in theactual installation.
1.4 Running the motor
1
!
!
![Page 8: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
Page 4 (78) HV9000EU-directive
2 EU-DIRECTIVE
2.1 CE-label
The CE-label on the product guarantees thefree movement of the product in the EU-area.According to the EU-rules this guarantees thatthe product is manufactured in accordancewith different directives relating to the product.
Cutler-Hammer HV9000s are equipped withthe CE-label in accordance with the LowVoltage Directive (LVD) and the EMC directive.
2.2 EMC-directive
2.2.1 General
The EMC directive (Electro MagneticCompatibility) states that the electricalequipment must not disturb the environmentand must be immune to other Electro MagneticDisturbances in the environment.
A Technical Construction File (TCF) existswhich demonstrates that the HV9000 drivesfulfill the requirements of the EMC directive. ATechnical Construction File has been used asa statement of conformity with the EMCdirective as it is not possible to test allcombinations of installation.
2.2.2 Technical criteria
The design intent was to develop a family ofdrives, which is user friendly and cost effective,while fulfilling the customer needs. EMCcompliance was a major consideration fromthe outset of the design.
The HV9000 series is targeted at the worldmarket. To ensure maximum flexibility, yetmeet the EMC needs of different regions, alldrives meet the highest immunity levels , whileemission levels are left to the user's choice.
The HV9000 does not include the requiredEMC filter, which is available as an option.For use within the EU the end user takespersonal responsibility for EMC compliance.
2.2.3 EMC-levels
The HV9000 series does not fulfil any EMCemission requirements without an optionalRFI-filter, either built-in or separate. With anRFI-filter, the drive fulfils the EMC emissionrequirements in the heavy industrialenvironment (standards EN50081-2 ,EN61800-3).
All products fulfil all EMC immunityrequirements (standards EN50082-1,-2 ,EN61800-3).
2.2.4 Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity areavailable upon request.
2
![Page 9: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
HV9000 Page 5 (78)Receiving
HV9 015 A C - 5 M 0 A 00 8 Â
3.1 Catalog Number
3 RECEIVING
This Cutler-Hammer HV9000 drive has beensubjected to demanding factory tests beforeshipment. After unpacking, check that thedevice does not show any signs of damageand that the HV9000 is as ordered (refer tothe model designation code in figure 3-1).
In the event of damage, please contact andfile a claim with the carrier involvedimmediately.
If the received equipment is not the same asordered, please contact your distributorimmediately.
Note! Do not destroy the packing. Thetemplate printed on the protective cardboardcan be used for marking the mounting pointsof the HV9000 on the wall.
Figure 3-1 Catalog number system.
3
Control/Communication Options À00 - No modification01 - 5 digital inputs, 2 analog inputs (1 Voltage,
1 Current), thermistor input, encoder input02 - 5 digital inputs, relay output, thermistor input03 - 5 digital inputs, 2 analog inputs (2 Voltage),
3 relay outputs, analog output (voltage), ther-mistor input, encoder input
04 - 5 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, analog out-put, thermistor input,
05 - Encoder board32 - ModBus RTU network communications34 - LonWorks network communications36 - Metasys® N2 Network Communications Á37 - APOGEE™ FLN Network Communications Á
Dynamic Braking Chopper Circuit ÃA - No chopper circuitB - Chopper circuit included. (Chopper circuit is
standard in all Compact NEMA 1 sizes)
Software (other than 0 denotes special)
Model HV9000
Hp size at VT rating
Series (only A at this time)
Control PanelM - HV Multi-lineG - HV Graphic
Enclosure RatingC - Compact Nema 1 (IP20)N - Std Chassis (IP00)P - Std protected chassis (IP20)S - Std NEMA 1 (IP21)J - Std NEMA 12 (IP54)G - Oversized NEMA 1D - Oversized NEMA 12
Voltage2 - 208 V Â, 230 V5 - 480 V6 - 575 V
À Control and communication options for Compact NEMA 1 are included in a separate expansion box
Á Contact Cutler-Hammer for availability
 208V requires 8 as first character in suffix
à Available as a factory installed option only
![Page 10: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
Page 6 (78) HV9000
3.2 Storing
If the HV9000 must be stored beforeinstallation and startup, check that theambient conditions in the storage area areacceptable (temperature -40°C - +60°C; (-40°F - + 140°F), relative humidity <95%, nocondensation allowed).
3.3 Warranty
This equipment is covered by the Cutler-Hammer standard drive warranty policy.
Cutler-Hammer distributors may have adifferent warranty period, which is specified intheir sales terms and conditions and warrantyterms.
If any questions arise concerning the warranty,please contact your distributor.
Receiving
3
![Page 11: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
HV9000 Page 7 (78)
and can be mounted externally and connectedvia a cable to the drive.
The Control I/O block is isolated from linepotential and is connected to ground via a 1 MΩresistor and 4.7 nF capacitor. If needed, theControl I/O block can be grounded without aresistor by changing the position of the jumperX4 (GND ON/OFF) on the control board.
The basic Control interface and parameters(Basic application) make the inverter easy tooperate. If a more versatile interface orparameter settings are needed, an optionalapplication can be selected with oneparameter from a "HVReady" applicationpackage. The application package manualdescribes these in more detail.
Input and Output EMC-filters are not requiredfor the functionality of the drive, they are onlyrequired for compliance with the EU EMC-directive.
Technical data
4 TECHNICAL DATA
4.1 General
Figure 4-1 shows a block diagram of theHV9000 drive.
The three phase AC-Choke with the DC-linkcapacitor forms an LC filter which together withthe Diode Bridge produce the DC voltage forthe IGBT Inverter Bridge block. The AC-Chokesmooths the HF-disturbances from the utilityto the drive and HF-disturbances caused bythe drive to the utility. It also improves thewaveform of the input current to the drive.
The IGBT bridge produces a symmetrical threephase pulse width modulated AC voltage to themotor. The power drawn from the supply isalmost entirely active power.
The Motor and Application Control block isbased on microprocessor software. Themicroprocessor controls the motor accordingto measured signals, parameter value settingsand commands from the Control I/O block andthe Control Panel. The Motor and ApplicationControl block gives commands to the MotorControl ASIC which calculates the IGBTswitching positions. Gate Drivers amplifythese signals for driving the IGBT inverterbridge.
The Control Panel is a link between the userand the drive. With the panel the user can setparameter values, read status data and givecontrol commands. The panel is removable
Figure 4-1 HV9000 block diagram.
4
=
=
L1
L2
L3
PE
U
V
W3~
3~MotorMains
PowerSupply
Measure-ments
Fan
RS 232
ControlPanel
ControlPanel
GalvanicIsolator Control
I/O* option
K4_1
OptionCard
MotorControlASIC
GateDrivers
IGBTInverterRectifierAC-choke
OptionalBrakeChopper
Brake resistor,if optional brakechopper is installed
CurrentSensors
Out
put E
MC
-fil
ter
Inpu
t EM
C-
filte
r
![Page 12: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
Page 8 (78) HV9000
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Compact Size
4
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).
1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802 1AMENtcapmoC,V802
PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO/eziSemarF
eziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
12
6.501
/3M1AMENtcapmoC
9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9 800B0M2-CA01F9VH
800B0M2-CA02F9VH
35
2/1-7
612203
/B4M1AMENtcapmoC
1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51
800B0M2-CA03F9VH800B0M2-CA05F9VH800B0M2-CA57F9VH
015102
347507
/B5M1AMENtcapmoC
5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33
800B0M2-CA0109VH800B0M2-CA5109VH800B0M2-CA0209VH
1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032 1AMENtcapmoC,V032PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
123
7.40.7
01
/3M1AMENtcapmoC
9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9
00B0M2-CA01F9VH00B0M2-CA02F9VH00B0M2-CA03F9VH
52/1-7
01
612203
/B4M1AMENtcapmoC
1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51
00B0M2-CA05F9VH00B0M2-CA57F9VH00B0M2-CA0109VH
510252
347507
/B5M1AMENtcapmoC
5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33
00B0M2-CA5109VH00B0M2-CA0209VH00B0M2-CA5209VH
1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084 1AMENtcapmoC,V084PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
1235
35.3
58
/3M1AMENtcapmoC
9.5x0.21x7.4)9.941x8.403x4.911( 9.9
00B0M5-CA01F9VH00B0M5-CA02F9VH00B0M5-CA03F9VH00B0M5-CA05F9VH
2/1-7015102
11511272
/B4M1AMENtcapmoC
1.8x4.51x3.5)7.502x2.193x6.431( 4.51
00B0M5-CA57F9VH00B0M5-CA0109VH00B0M5-CA5109VH00B0M5-CA0209VH
520304
430425
/B5M1AMENtcapmoC
5.8x8.22x3.7)9.512x1.975x4.581( 1.33
00B0M5-CA5209VH00B0M5-CA0309VH00B0M5-CA0409VH
Technical data
![Page 13: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
HV9000 Page 9 (78)Technical data
4
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.
1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802 1AMEN,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
23
0161 1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4
)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-SA02F9VH800A0M2-SA03F9VH
52/1-7
01
220334
1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
800A0M2-SA05F9VH800A0M2-SA57F9VH800A0M2-SA0109VH
51025203
750738311
1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48
800A0M2-SA5109VH800A0M2-SA0209VH800A0M2-SA5209VH800A0M2-SA0309VH
040506
931561002
1AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081
800A0M2-SA0409VH800A0M2-SA0509VH800A0M2-SA0609VH
57 462 1AMEN/8M 41x8.05x5.91)6.553x3.0921x3.594( 733 800A0M2-SA5709VH
21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802 21AMEN,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
23
0161 21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4
)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-JA02F9VH800A0M2-JA03F9VH
52/1-7
01
220334
21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
800A0M2-JA05F9VH800A0M2-JA57F9VH800A0M2-JA0109VH
51025203
750738311
21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48
800A0M2-JA5109VH800A0M2-JA0209VH800A0M2-JA5209VH800A0M2-JA0309VH
040506
931561002
21AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081
800A0M2-JA0409VH800A0M2-JA0509VH800A0M2-JA0609VH
57 462 21AMEN/8M 41x8.05x5.91)6.553x3.0921x3.594( 733 800A0M2-JA5709VH
sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V802PHdetaR & tnerruCtuptuO
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
23
0161 detcetorP/4M 5.8x4.11x7.4
)9.512x6.982x4.911( 6.71 800A0M2-PA02F9VH800A0M2-PA03F9VH
52/1-7
01
220334
detcetorP/5M 4.9x9.51x2.6)8.832x9.304x5.751( 3.53
800A0M2-PA05F9VH800A0M2-PA57F9VH800A0M2-PA0109VH
51025203
750738311
detcetorP/6M 4.11x7.02x7.8)6.982x8.525x0.122( 2.77
800A0M2-PA5109VH800A0M2-PA0209VH800A0M2-PA5209VH800A0M2-PA0309VH
040506
931561002
detcetorP/7M 4.21x5.13x8.9)0.513x1.008x9.842( 531
800A0M2-NA0409VH800A0M2-NA0509VH800A0M2-NA0609VH
57 462 sissahC/8M Á9.31x0.53x5.91
)1.353x988x3.594( 733 800A0M2-NA5709VH
![Page 14: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
Page 10 (78) HV9000
4
Technical Data
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).
1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032 1AMEN,V032tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
3 01 1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-SA03F9VH
52/1-7
0151
61220334
1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M2-SA05F9VH00A0M2-SA57F9VH00A0M2-SA0109VH00A0M2-SA5109VH
02520304
750738311
1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48
00A0M2-SA0209VH00A0M2-SA5209VH00A0M2-SA0309VH00A0M2-SA0409VH
050657
931561002
1AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081
00A0M2-SA0509VH00A0M2-SA0609VH00A0M2-SA5709VH
001 462 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-SA0019VH
21AMEN,V032 21AMEN,V032 21AMEN,V032 21AMEN,V032 21AMEN,V032tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
3 01 21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-JA03F9VH
52/1-7
0151
61220334
21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M2-JA05F9VH00A0M2-JA57F9VH00A0M2-JA0109VH00A0M2-JA5109VH
02520304
750738311
21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48
00A0M2-JA0209VH00A0M2-JA5209VH00A0M2-JA0309VH00A0M2-JA0409VH
050657
931561002
21AMEN/7M 31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 081
00A0M2-JA0509VH00A0M2-JA0609VH00A0M2-JA5709VH
001 462 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-JA0019VH
![Page 15: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
HV9000 Page 11 (78)Technical data
4
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.
sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032 sissahC/sissahCdetcetorP,V032tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
3 01 detcetorP/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71 00A0M2-PA03F9VH
52/1-7
0151
61220334
detcetorP/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M2-PA05F9VH00A0M2-PA57F9VH00A0M2-PA0109VH00A0M2-PA5109VH
02520304
750738311
detcetorP/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 48
00A0M2-PA0209VH00A0M2-PA5209VH00A0M2-PA0309VH00A0M2-PA0409VH
050657
931561002
sissahC/7M Á31x4.93x7.41
)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 08100A0M2-NA0509VH00A0M2-NA0609VH00A0M2-NA5709VH
001 462 sissahC/8M Á9.31x6.74x5.91
)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 733 00A0M2-NA0019VH
![Page 16: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
Page 12 (78) HV9000
4
Technical Data
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.
1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSeruoslcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
52/1-7
01
81151
1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71
00A0M5-SA05F9VH00A0M2-SA57F9VH00A0M2-SA0109VH
510252
127223
1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M5-SA5109VH00A0M5-SA0209VH00A0M5-SA5209VH
0304050657
0425567769
1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38
00A0M5-SA0309VH00A0M5-SA0409VH00A0M5-SA0509VH00A0M5-SA0609VH00A0M5-SA5709VH
001521051
521061081
1AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122
00A0M5-SA0019VH00A0M5-SA5219VH00A0M5-SA0519VH
002052
062023 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91
)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-SA0029VH00A0M5-SA0529VH
003004
004064 1AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72
)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-SA0039VH00A0M5-SA0049VH
21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSeruoslcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
52/1-7
01
81151
21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71
00A0M5-JA05F9VH00A0M2-JA57F9VH00A0M2-JA0109VH
510252
127223
21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M5-JA5109VH00A0M5-JA0209VH00A0M5-JA5209VH
0304050657
0425567769
21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38
00A0M5-JA0309VH00A0M5-JA0409VH00A0M5-JA0509VH00A0M5-JA0609VH00A0M5-JA5709VH
001521051
521061081
21AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122
00A0M5-JA0019VH00A0M5-JA5219VH00A0M5-JA0519VH
002052
062023 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91
)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-JA0029VH00A0M5-JA0529VH
003004
004064 21AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72
)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-JA0039VH00A0M5-JA0049VH
![Page 17: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
HV9000 Page 13 (78)Technical data
4
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.
1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084 1AMEN,V084tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
52/1-7
01
81151
1AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71
00A0M5-SA05F9VH00A0M2-SA57F9VH00A0M2-SA0109VH
510252
127223
1AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M5-SA5109VH00A0M5-SA0209VH00A0M5-SA5209VH
0304050657
0425567769
1AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38
00A0M5-SA0309VH00A0M5-SA0409VH00A0M5-SA0509VH00A0M5-SA0609VH00A0M5-SA5709VH
001521051
521061081
1AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122
00A0M5-SA0019VH00A0M5-SA5219VH00A0M5-SA0519VH
002052
062023 1AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91
)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-SA0029VH00A0M5-SA0529VH
003004
004064 1AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72
)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-SA0039VH00A0M5-SA0049VH
21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084 21AMEN,V084tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
52/1-7
01
81151
21AMEN/4M 5.8x4.51x7.4)9.512x2.193x4.911( 6.71
00A0M5-JA05F9VH00A0M2-JA57F9VH00A0M2-JA0109VH
510252
127223
21AMEN/5M 4.9x3.02x2.6)8.832x6.515x5.751( 3.53
00A0M5-JA5109VH00A0M5-JA0209VH00A0M5-JA5209VH
0304050657
0425567769
21AMEN/6M 4.11x6.52x7.8)6.982x2.056x0.122( 8.38
00A0M5-JA0309VH00A0M5-JA0409VH00A0M5-JA0509VH00A0M5-JA0609VH00A0M5-JA5709VH
001521051
521061081
21AMEN/7M 0.31x4.93x7.41)2.033x8.0001x4.373( 122
00A0M5-JA0019VH00A0M5-JA5219VH00A0M5-JA0519VH
002052
062023 21AMEN/8M 9.31x6.74x5.91
)1.353x0.9021x3.594( 903 00A0M5-JA0029VH00A0M5-JA0529VH
003004
004064 21AMEN/9M 4.51x1.65x6.72
)2.193x9.4241x0.107( 475 00A0M5-JA0039VH00A0M5-JA0049VH
![Page 18: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
Page 14 (78) HV9000
4
4.2 Power Ratings – Base Drives – Standard
sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575 sissahC/1AMEN,V575tnerruCtuptuO&PHdetaR
/eziSemarFeziSerusolcnE
snoisnemiDDxHxW
)mm(dnasehcnIni
thgieW.sblni rebmuNgolataCeuqroTelbairaV
PH tvI À
35
2/1-70151025203
5.45.7
014191326253
1AMEN/5M 4.01x3.71x2.6)2.462x4.934x5.751( 1.33
00A0M6-SA03F9VH00A0M6-SA05F9VH00A0M6-SA57F9VH00A0M6-SA0109VH00A0M6-SA5109VH00A0M6-SA0209VH00A0M6-SA5209VH00A0M6-SA0309VH
04050657001
24252658001
1AMEN/6M 4.11x3.42x7.8)6.982x2.716x0.122( 8.38
00A0M6-SA0409VH00A0M6-SA0509VH00A0M6-SA0609VH00A0M6-SA5709VH00A0M6-SA0019VH
521051
221541 sissahC/8M Á
9.31x0.53x5.91)1.353x0.988x3.594( 003 00A0M6-NA5219VH
00A0M6-NA0519VH
002052
222782 sissahC/9M Á
4.51x4.93x6.72)2.193x8.0001x0.107( 664 00A0M6-NA0029VH
00A0M6-NA0529VH
003004
523093 sissahC/01M Á
4.51x4.93x9.83)2.193x8.0001x1.889( 206 00A0M6-NA0039VH
00A0M6-NA0049VH
À Ivt = continuous rated input and output current (variable torque load, max. 40°C ambient).Á Protected enclosure with option.
Technical data
![Page 19: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
HV9000 Page 15 (78)
4.3 Specifications
Utility Input voltage Vin 208V, 230V, 480V, 575V
connection Input frequency 45—66 Hz
Connection to the mains once per minute or less (normally)
Motor Output voltage 0 — Vin
Connection Continuous output IVT: ambient max +40°C, 1.1 x IVT (1min/10 min)current
Starting torque 200%
Starting current 2.5 x ICT: 2 s every 20 s if output frequency <30 Hzand if the heatsink temperature <+60°C
Output frequency 0—500 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Control Control method Frequency Control (V/Hz)characte-ristics
Switching frequency 1—16 kHz (depending on horsepower rating)
Frequency Analog I/P Resolution 12 bit, accuracy ±1%reference Panel refer. Resolution 0.01 Hz
Field weakening point 30—500 Hz
Acceleration time 0.1—3000 s
Deceleration time 0.1—3000 s
Braking torque DC brake: 30%*TN (without brake option)
Environ- Ambient operating -10 (no frost)—+40°C at IVT, (1.1 x ICT max 1min/10 min)mental temperaturelimits
Storage temperature -40°C—+60°C
Relative humidity <95%, no condensation allowed
Air quality- chemical vapors IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, class 3C2- mechanical particles IEC 721-3-3, unit in operation, class 3S2
Altitude Max 1000 m at continuous IVT specificationOver 1000 m reduce IVT by 1% per each 100 mAbsolute maximum altitude 3000 m
Vibration Operation: max displacement amplitude 3 mm(IEC 721-3-3) at 2—9 Hz,
Max acceleration amplitude 0.5 G at 9—200 Hz
Shock Operation: max 8 G, 11 ms(IEC 68-2-27) Storage and shipping: max 15 G, 11 ms (in the package)
Enclosure Open and protected chassis (IP00 and IP20)Compact NEMA 1 (IP20)NEMA 1 (IP21)NEMA 12 (IP54)Oversized NEMA 1Oversized NEMA 12
Technical data
Table 4.3-1 Specifications
4
![Page 20: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
Page 16 (78) HV9000
EMC Noise immunity Fulfils EN50082-1,-2 , EN61800-3
Emissions Equipped with an optional external RFI-Filterfulfils EN50081-2 , EN61800-3
Safety Fulfils EN50178, EN60204 -1,CE, UL, C-UL, FI, GOST R(check from the unit nameplate specified approvals for each unit)
Control Analog voltage 0—+10 V, Ri = 200 kΩ, single ended
connections (-10—+10V , joystick control), resolution12 bit, accur. ±1%
Analog current 0 (4) — 20 mA, Ri = 250 Ω, differential
Digital inputs (6) Positive or negative logic
Aux. voltage +24 V ±20%, max 100 mA
Pot. meter reference +10 V -0% — +3%, max 10 mA
Analog output 0 (4) — 20 mA, RL <500 Ω, resolution 10 bit, accur. ±3%
Digital output Open collector output, 50 mA/48 V
Relay outputs Max switching voltage: 300 V DC, 250 V ACMax switching load: 8A / 24 V
0.4 A / 250 V DC2 kVA / 250 V AC
Max continuous load: 2 A rms
Protective Overcurrent protection Trip limit 4 x IVT
functions Overvoltage protection Utility voltage: 208 VTrip limit: 1.55 x Vin
Utility voltage: 230 VTrip limit: 1.41 x
V
in
Utility voltage: 480 VTrip limit: 1.41 x Vin
Utility voltage: 575 VTrip limit: 1.62 x
V
in
Undervoltage protection Trip limit 0.65 x Vn
Ground-fault protection Protects the inverter from an ground-fault in the output(motor or motor cable)
Utility supervision Trip if any of the input phases is missing
Motor phase supervision Trip if any of the output phases is missing
Unit over temperature Yesprotection
Motor overload protection Yes
Stall protection Yes
Motor underload protection Yes
Short-circuit protection of Yes+24V and +10V reference voltages
Technical data
Table 4.3-1 Specifications.
4
![Page 21: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
5
InstallationHV9000 Page 17 (78)
5 INSTALLATION
5.1 Ambient conditions
The environmental limits mentioned in table4.3-1 must not be exceeded.
5.2 Cooling
The specified space around the driveensures proper cooling air circulation. Seetable 5.2-1 for dimensions. If multiple unitsare to be installed above each other, thedimensions must be b+c and air from theoutlet of the lower unit must be directedaway from the inlet of the upper unit.
With high switching frequencies and highambient temperatures the maximum con-tinuous output current has to be deratedaccording to Table 5.2-3 and Figures 5.2-3a-d.
Table 5.2 -1 Installation space dimensions. Table 5.2-2 Required cooling air.
Frame Size / Enclosure Style Dimensions ( in )
a a2 b c
M3 / Compact NEMA 1 1 0.5 4 2
M4 / Protected & NEMA 12
M4 / NEMA 1 1 1 4 2
M4B / M5B Compact NEMA 1 1 0.5 5 2.5
M5 / Protected & NEMA 12
M5 / NEMA 1 1 1 5 2.5
M6 / Protected & NEMA 12 1.5 4 6.5 3.5
M6 / NEMA 1 1.5 1.5 6.5 3.5
M7 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 3 ( 1.5 )** 3 ( 2.5 )** 12 4
M7 / NEMA 1
M8 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 10*** ( 3 )** 3 12
M8 / NEMA 1
M9 / Chassis* & NEMA 12 8*** ( 3 )** 3 12
M9 / NEMA 1
M10 / Chassis & NEMA 12 8*** ( 3 )** 3 12
M10 / NEMA 1
M11 / Chassis & NEMA 12
M11 / NEMA 1 Contact Factory
M12 / Chassis & NEMA 12
M12 / NEMA 1
a2 - Distance from inverter to inverter in multiple inverter
installations
* - Protected enclosure with optional cover.
** - Minimum allowable space - No space available for fan
change.
*** - Space for fan change on sides of inverter.
Figure 5.2-1 Installation space.
b
a
c
a
PH erusolcnE/egatloV deriuqeR)MFC(wolfriA
2-1 1AMENtcapmoC/802
24
3-2 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/802
3-1 1AMENtcapmoC/032
5-3 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/032
01-1 1AMENtcapmoC/084
51-5 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/084
02-3 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/575
51-3 1AMENtcapmoC/802
001
01-5 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/802
02-5 1AMENtcapmoC/032
51-5.7 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/032
03-51 1AMENtcapmoC/084
05-02 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/084
57-52 1AMEN&detcetorP/575
02 1AMENtcapmoC/802
812
03-51 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/802
52 1AMENtcapmoC/032
04-02 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/032
04 1AMENtcapmoC/084
57-06 21/1AMEN&sissahC/084
001 1AMEN&detcetorP/575
57-04 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/802
383001-05 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/032
051-001 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/084
052-002 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/084567
051-521 1AMEN&detcetorP/575
004-003 21/1AMEN&detcetorP/0848411
052-002 1AMEN&detcetorP/575
004-003 1AMEN&detcetorP/575 6371
![Page 22: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
Page 18 (78) HV9000
5
Installation
Figure 5.2-2bFigure 5.2-2a
Figures 5.2-2a—c Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 480V(IVT,variable torque) for standard enclosures
Figure 5.2-2c 200-400 HP
30-150 HP
2 - 75 HP 30-100 HPFigure 5.2-2d Figure 5.2-2e
Figures 5.2-2d—e: Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 230 V(IVT,variable torque) for standard enclosures.
3 - 25 hp
1200HV9025
W
fsw [kHz]
HV9020
HV9015
HV9F10
HV9F75
HV9F50HV9F30
1000
800
600
400
200
01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
HV9150
HV9125
HV9100
HV9075
HV9060
HV9050
HV9040HV9030
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
W
0 fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
HV9400
HV9250
HV9300
HV9200
16 000
14 000
12 000
10 000
8 000
6 000
4 000
W
fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
HV9025
HV9020
HV9015
HV9010
HV9F75
HV9F50
HV9F30
1 200
1 000
800
600
400
200
W
fsw [kHz]
1 2 3 4 5 6
HV9100
HV9075
HV9060
HV9050HV9040
HV9030
4 000
3 000
2 000
1 000
W
fsw [kHz]
1 2 3 4 5 6
![Page 23: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
5
InstallationHV9000 Page 19 (78)
Figures 5.2-2 f—h: Power dissipation as a function of the switching frequency for 480V(IVT,variable torque), Compact Nema 1.
Figure 5.2-2f Figure 5.2-2g
Figure 5.2-2h
50
100
150
Po
wer
loss
/ W
0
200
250
300
3000 10000 16000
Switching frequency / Hz
HV9F10
HV9F20
HV9F30
HV9F50
Po
wer
loss
/ W
3000 10000 16000
Switching frequency / Hz
HV9F75
HV9010
HV9015
HV9020
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
Po
wer
loss
/ W
0
3000 10000 16000
Switching frequency / Hz
HV9025
HV9030
HV9040
1000
600
800
200
400
1200
1400
1600
![Page 24: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Page 20 (78) HV9000
5
Installation
Type Curve(HP) 3.6kHz 10kHz 16kHz
1-5 no derating no derating no derating7.5 no derating 1 210 no derating no derating no derating15 no derating no derating no derating20 no derating no derating 325 no derating no derating no derating30 no derating no derating 440 no derating 5 not allowed50 no derating 6 not allowed60 7 8 not allowed75 no derating 9 not allowed100 no derating 10 not allowed125 11 12 not allowed150 no derating 13 not allowed175 no derating 14 not allowed200 15 16 not allowed250 no derating 17 not allowed300 18 19 not allowed400 * * *
Figure 5.2-3a—d:Constant output current (IVT) derating curves as a function of ambient temperatureand switching frequency.
Figure 5.2-3 dFigure 5.2.3 c
Figure 5.2.3 b
Figure 5.2.3 a
Table 5.2-3 Constant output current deratingcurves for 480 V (IVT,variable torque).
* = Ask the details from the factory
IVT (A)
˚C
120
100
10 20 30 40 500
80
60
40
20
0
HV9075 IVT 3.6 kHz
HV9060 IVT 10 kHz
HV9050 IVT 10 kHz
HV9075IVT 10 kHz
HV9040 IVT 16 kHz
7
8
6
5
4
HV9400
HV9250
HV9300
HV9200
16 000
14 000
12 000
10 000
8 000
6 000
4 000
W
fsw [kHz]1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
HV9025
HV9020
HV9015
HV9010
HV9F75
HV9F50
HV9F30
1 200
1 000
800
600
400
200
W
fsw [kHz]
1 2 3 4 5 6
IVT (A)
˚C
HV9025IVT 16 kHz
HV9010IVT 10 kHz
HV9010IVT 16 kHz
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
00 10 20 30 40 50
3
1
2
![Page 25: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
5
InstallationHV9000 Page 21 (78)
5.3 Mounting
The HV9000 should be mounted in a verticalposition on the wall or on the back plane of acubicle. Follow the requirement for cooling,see table 5.2-1 and figure 5.2-1 fordimensions.
To ensure a safe installation, make sure thatthe mounting surface is relatively flat.Mounting holes can be marked on the wallusing the template on the cover of thecardboard shipping package.
Mounting is done with four screws or boltsdepending on the size of the unit, see tables5.3-1 and 5.3-2, and figure 5.3-1 fordimensions. Units, from 25 Hp to 500 Hp, havespecial lifting "eyes" which must be used, seefigures 5.3-2 and 5.3-3.
The mounting instructions for units over 500Hp are given in a separate manual. If furtherinformation is needed contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor.
Figure 5.3-1 Mounting dimensions.
Table 5.3-1 Dimensions for open panel units.
Frame Enclosure Voltage Dimensions (inches)W1 W2 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 R1 R2
M3 Compact 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 13.5 13.1 12 5.9 0.28 0.14M4B NEMA 1 208 / 230 / 480 5.3 3.7 17 16.5 15.4 8.1 0.28 0.14M5B 208 / 230 / 480 7.3 5.5 23.4 22.8 21.7 8.5 0.35 0.18
M4 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 16.7 16.2 15.4 8.5 0.28 0.14M5 208 / 230 / 480 6.2 5 22.1 21.5 20.3 9.4 0.35 0.18M6 208 / 230 / 480 8.7 7.1 27.6 26.9 25.6 11.4 0.35 0.18M7 NEMA 1 / 12 208 / 230 / 480 14.7 13.6 41.3 40.6 39.4 13 0.35 0.18M8 208 / 230 / 480 19.5 18 53.1 36.5 50.8 13.9 0.45 0.24M9 480 27.6 26 57.9 40.2 56.1 15.4 0.45 0.24M10 480 CONTACT FACTORY
M4 208 / 230 / 480 4.7 3.7 12.7 12.3 11.4 1.6 8.5 0.28 0.14M5 208 / 230 / 480 6.2 5 17.8 17.1 15.9 1.8 9.4 0.35 0.18M5 575 6.2 5 19.1 18.5 17.3 1.8 10.4 0.35 0.18M6 230 / 380 / 480 8.7 7.1 22.6 22 20.7 3.9 11.4 0.35 0.18M6 Chassis / 600 8.7 7.1 26.3 25.6 24.3 3.9 11.4 0.35 0.18M7 Protected 208 / 230 / 480 9.8 8.7 33.6 32.9 31.5 12.4 0.35 0.18M8 575 19.5 18 37.4 36.5 35 13.9 0.45 0.24M9 480 / 575 27.6 26 41.1 40.2 39.4 15.4 0.45 0.24M10 480 / 575 38.9 37.3 41.1 40.2 39.4 15.4 0.45 0.24M11 480 / 575 CONTACT FACTORYM12 480 / 575
W1
H1 H2
D1
H3
H4
R2
R1
R2
W2
![Page 26: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Page 22 (78) HV9000
5
Installation
Figure 5.3-2 Lifting of 30—150 Hp units.
Figure 5.3-3 Lifting of 200—400 Hp units.
NOTE!Unit sizes 200 — 400 Hp - do not lift without a rod through the lifting holes inthe unit - see above.
L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + + L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +
WRONG CORRECT
![Page 27: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
HV9000 Page 23 (78)
6
6 WIRING
General wiring diagrams are shown in figures6-1—6-3. The following chapters have moredetailed instructions about wiring and cableconnections.
Wiring
Figure 6-1: General wiring diagram, open/protected chassis units frame sizes M4—M6 .
The general wiring diagrams for M11 and M12frame sizes are provided in a separate manual.If further information is required, contact yourCutler-Hammer distributor.
U V W- +
M3~
DO1
21
22
24
25
RO2/1
RO2/3
2/2
RO1/3
1/2
18
19
U<+48VI<50mA
ac/dc
+
R
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Vin +1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
Iin +
Iin -
GND
DIA1
DIA2
DIA3
CMA
GND
DIB4
DIB5
DIB6
CMB
24 V
GND
24 V
GND
x)
x)
0(4)/20mARL<500Ω
k6_1
1)
RO1/1
1) Brake Chopper (Optional)
Switching: <8A/24Vdc,<0.4A/300Vdc,<2kVA/250VacContinuously:<2Arms
Brake Resistor(Optional)
24Vout
Reference(voltage)
Reference(current)
+10 Vref.
24Vout
Iout+
Iout-
x) dotted line indicates the connection with inverted signal levels
RFI-Filter (Optional)
![Page 28: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
Page 24 (78) HV9000
6
Figure 6-2 General wiring diagram, open/protected chassis frame size > M7 and NEMA 1/12 units framesize > M8.
Wiring
U V W
- +
M3~
DO1
21
22
24
25
RO2/1
RO2/3
2/2
RO1/3
1/2
18
19
U<+48VI<50mA
ac/dcR
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Uin +1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
Iin +
Iin -
GND
DIA1
DIA2
DIA3
CMA
GND
DIB4
DIB5
DIB6
CMB
24 V
GND
24 V
GND
x)
x)
0(4)/20mARL<500Ω
k6_2
1)
RO1/1
1) Brake- Chopper (Optional)
Switching: <8A/24Vdc,<0.4A/300Vdc,<2kVA/250VacContinuously:<2Arms
24Vout
Reference(voltage)
Reference(current)
+10 Vref.
24Vout
Iout+
Iout-
RFI-Filter (Optional)
x) dotted line indicates the connection with inverted signal levels
+
Brake Resistor(Optional)
![Page 29: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
HV9000 Page 25 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6-3 General wiring diagram, NEMA 1/12 units frame sizes M4 to M7 and Compact NEMA 1 units.
U V
DO1
21
22
24
25
RO2/1
RO2/3
2/2
RO1/3
1/2
18
19
U<+48VI<50mA
ac/dcR
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
Uin +1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
GND
Iin +
Iin -
GND
DIA1
DIA2
DIA3
CMA
GND
DIB4
DIB5
DIB6
CMB
24 V
GND
24 V
GND
x)
x)
0(4)/20mARL<500Ω
RO1/1
M3~
k6_3
+
1)
-
W
1) Brake Chopper (Optional)
Switching: <8A/24Vdc,<0.4A/300Vdc,<2kVA/250VacContinuously:<2Arms
Brake Resistor(Optional)
24Vout
Reference(voltage)
Reference(current)
+10 Vref.
24Vout
Iout+
out-
Internal RFI-
x) dotted line indicates the connection with inverted signal levels
![Page 30: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Page 26 (78) HV9000
6
6.1 Power connections
Use heat-resistant cables, +60°C or higher.The cable (and the fuses) must be sized inaccordance with the rated output current ofthe unit. Installation of the cable consistentwith the UL-instructions is explained inchapter 6.1.4.1.
The minimum dimensions for the Cu-cablesand corresponding fuses are given in thetables 6.1-2 — 6.1-5. The fuses have beenselected so that they will also function asoverload protection for the cables.
Consistent with UL requirements, formaximum protection of the HV9000, ULrecognized fuses type RK should be used.
If the motor temperature protection (I2t) isused as overload protection the cables maybe selected according to that. If 3 or morecables are used in parallel, on the largerunits, every cable must have it's ownoverload protection.
These instructions cover the case whereone motor is connected with one cable tothe drive.
Wiring
Always pay attention to the local authorityregulations and installation conditions.
6.1.1 Utility cable
Utility cables for the different EU EMC levelsare defined in table 6.1-1.
6.1.2 Motor cable
Motor cables for the different EU EMC levelsare defined in table 6.1-1.
6.1.3 Control cable
Control cables are specified in chapter6.2.1.
Cable level N level I
Utility cable 1 1
Motor cable 2 2
Control cable 3 3
Table 6.1-1 Cable types for the different EMC levels.
1 = The power cable suitable for the installation, ampacity and voltage.Shielded cable is not required.
2 = The power cable contains a concentric protection wire, and is suitable for the ampacity and voltage.For maximum EMC protection, use of shielded cable is required.
3 = The control cable has a compact low-impedance shield.
![Page 31: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
HV9000 Page 27 (78)
6Table 6.1-2 Utility, motor cables and fuse recommendations according to IVT
output current 480V range.
Wiring
Table 6.1-4 Utility, motor cables and fuserecommendations according to IVToutput current, 575V range.
PHV084 tvI esuFelbac-uC
ROTOM&YTILITU)dnuorG(
1 3
01 )61(613 5
5 8
5.7 11 51 )41(41
01 51 02 )21(21
51 12 52 )01(01
02 72 53
)8(852 23 05
03 04 05
04 25 06 )6(6
05 56 08 )6(4
06 77 001 )6(2
57 69 521 )4(0
001 521 051 )2(00
521 061 002)0(000
051 081 002
002 062 003 )000(MCM053
052 023 004 ])00(MCM052[x2
003 004 005 ])000(MCM053[x2
004 064 006 ])MCM052(MCM055[x2
PHV575 tvI esuFelbac-uC
ROTOM&YTILITU)dnuorG(
3
41 51 )41(415
5.7
01
51 91 02 )21(21
02 32 52 )01(01
52 62 53
)8(803 53 53
04 24 05
05 25 06)6(6
06 26 001
57 58 001)6(2
001 001 001
521 221 521 )4(0
051 541 001 )2(00
002 222 052 )00(MCM003
052 782 003 )000(MCM053
![Page 32: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Page 28 (78) HV9000
6
Table 6.1-5 Utility, motor cables and fuserecommendations according to IVToutput current 230V range.
Table 6.1-6 Maximum cable sizes of the powerterminals
PHV032 tvI esuFelbac-uC
ROTOM&YTILITU)dnuorG(
1 7.4
01 )61(612 7
3 01
5 61 51 )41(41
5.7 22 52 )01(01
01 03 53)8(8
51 34 05
02 75 06 )6(6
52 07 08 )6(4
03 38 001 )6(2
04 311 521 )4(0
05 931 051 )2(00
06 561 002)0(000
57 002 002
001 462 003 )000(MCM053
emarF pH egatloV)MCM/GWA(ELBAC
niaM dnuorG
3M llA 084/032 41 41
4M llA 084/032 01 01
B4M llA 084/0326 6
5M llA 575/084/032
B5M52-51 032
2 00
04-52 084
6M
04-02 032
04-03 084
06-04 575
57-05 084lA00,uC 00
001-57 575
7M57-05 032
MCM053lAMCM005x2 000
051-001 084
8M
001 032
052-002 084
051-521 575
9M004-003 084
MCM006x2 MCM005x2052-002 575
01M 004-003 575 MCM005x4 À MCM005x2
À desuebnacselbacdetcennoclellarap3mumixam21/1AMEN
Wiring
![Page 33: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
HV9000 Page 29 (78)
6
6.1.4 Installation instructions
If a HV9000 open chassis unit is to be installed outside a control cabinet or aseparate cubicle a protective ÍP20 cover should be installed to cover the cableconnections, see figure 6.1.4-3. The protective cover may not be needed if theunit is mounted inside a control cabinet or a separate cubicle.
All open chassis HV9000 units should always be mounted inside a controlcabinet, or a separate cubicle.
Locate the motor cable away from the other cables:
- Avoid long parallel runs with other cables.- If the motor cable runs in parallel with the other cables, the minimum
distances given in table 6.1.4-1 between the motor cable and controlcables should be followed.
- These minimum distances apply also between the motor cable andsignal cable of other systems.
- The maximum length of a motor cable can be 600ft (180 m) (exceptfor ratings 2 Hp and below max. length is 160 ft (50 m) and 3 Hp max.length 330 ft (100 m)). The power cables should cross other cables at anangle of 90° degrees. An output dv/dt filter option is required for motor cablelengths exceeding 33ft (10m) for drive 2 Hp and below and 100ft (33m) fordrives 3Hp and larger.
Distance Motorbetween cables cable lengthft (m) ft (m)1 (0.3) <165 (50)
3.3 (1) <600 (180)
See chapter 6.1.5 for cable insulation checks.
Connecting cables:
- Motor and utility cables should be stripped according to figure 6.1.4-2and table 6.1.4-2.
- Open the cover of the HV9000 according to figure 6.1.4-3.- Remove sufficient plugs from the cable cover (open chassis) or from the
bottom of the NEMA 1/12 units.- Pass cables through the holes in the cable cover.- Connect the utility, motor and control cables to the correct terminals.
See figures 6.1.4-3—16. HV9000 + external RFI-filter: (See RFI-filteroption manual). Contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor for moreinformation. Cable installation consistent with UL-instructions isexplained in chapter 6.1.4.1.
- Check that control cable wires do not make contact with electricalcomponents in the device.
- Connect optional brake resistor cable (if required).- Ensure the ground cable is connected to the -terminal of the
frequency converter and motor.- For open chassis units, 200-400 Hp, connect the isolator plates of the
protective cover and terminals according to figure 6.1.4-11.
Wiring
1
2
43
Table 6.1.4-1 Minimum cable distances.
![Page 34: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Page 30 (78) HV9000
6
- If a shielded power cable is used, connect its shield to the ground terminalsof the drive, motor and supply panel.
- Mount the cable cover (open chassis units) and the unit cover.- Ensure the control cables and internal wiring are not trapped between the
cover and the body of the unit.
NOTE:
The connection of the transformer inside the unit in frame sizes M7—M19 hasto be changed if other than the default supply voltage of the drive is used.Contact your Cutler-Hammer distributor if more information is needed.
Voltage Code (VC) Default Supply Voltage
2 230V
5 480V
6 575V
Wiring
5
![Page 35: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
HV9000 Page 31 (78)
6
6.1.4.1 Cable selection and installationfor the UL listing
For Installation and cable connections the fol-lowing must be noted. Use only with copperwire temperature rating of at least 60/75°C.
Units are suitable for use on a circuit capableof delivering not more than the fault RMSsymmetrical amperes mentioned in the table6.1.4.1-1, 480V maximum.
In addition to the connecting information thetightening torque of the terminals are definedin the table 6.1.4.1-2.
Table 6.1.4.1-1 Maximum symmetrical supply current.
Table 6.1.4.1-2 Tightening torque.
Wiring
emarF egatloV lacirtemmysSMRmumixaMtiucricylppusnoserepma
3M llA 000,53
21M-4M llA 000,001
emarF pH egatloV gninethgiT)sbl-ni(euqrot
3M llA llA 7
B4M llA llA 7
B5M llA llA 02
4M llA llA 7
5M llA llA 02
6M 52-02 032 53
6M 04-03 032 44
6M 04-03 084 53
6M 57-05 084 44
6M 05-04 575 53
6M 001-05 575 44
7M llA llA 44
8M llA llA 016 À
9M llA llA 016 À
À seodrabsubehtfoffodnatsdetalosiehT.euqrotgninethgitdetsilehtdnatshtiwton
euqrotretnuocylppaothcnerwaesU.gninethgitnehw
![Page 36: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
Page 32 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-2 Opening the cover of the HV9000.
Figure 6.1.4-1 Stripping motor and utilitycables.
Table 6.1.4-2 Stripping lengths of the cables (in).
L2L3
L1L4
Groundconductor
Utilitycables
3
2
1 1
3
2
IP54KANS
1 Loosen screws (2 pcs)
2 Pull cover bottom outwards
3 Push cover upwards
emarF pH egatloV).ni(shtgneLgnippirtS
1s 2s 3s 4s
3M llA 084/032 74.0 2.2 2.2 74.0
4M llA 084/032 42.0 4.1 4.2 6.0
B4M llA 084/032 42.0 4.1 4.2 6.0
5M llA 575/084/032 53.0 6.1 4 6.0
B5M52-51 03203-52 084
6M
04-02 0326.0 6.1 4 6.004-03 084
06-04 575
57-05 084
1 6.1 4 6.0001-57 575
7M001-05 032
051-521 084 2 1
8M052-002 084
YROTCAFTCATNOC
051-521 575
9M004-003 084
052-002 575
004-053 575
![Page 37: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
HV9000 Page 33 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-3 Cable assembly for open chassis: 5 - 25 Hp voltage code 4 and 3 - 15 Hp code 2.
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
L1 L2 L3 - + U V W
Power card
Fixing screw
Control cable
Utility cable
Motor Cable
Fixing screw
Brake resistor cable
Fixing screw
Control card
Control I/Oterminals
Connect the shieldto the terminal
Fix the control cablewith a tie wrap
Groundterminals
(PE)
Utility cableterminals
(L1, L2, L3)
DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–,+)
Motor cableterminals(U,V,W)
![Page 38: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
Page 34 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-4 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1: 5 - 10 Hp voltage code 5 and 3 Hp code 2
Control card
I/O terminals
Connect the shieldto the terminal
Fix the controlcable with a tiewrap
Ground terminal
Utility cableterminalsDC-link/brakeresistor terminals
Motor cableterminals
Motor cableBrake resistor cable
Utility cableControl cable
Ground terminal
m4IP21
Rubber grommets
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
L1 L2 L3 - + U V W
![Page 39: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
HV9000 Page 35 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-5 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1: 15 - 25 Hp voltage code 5 and 5 - 15 Hp code 2.
Control card
I/O terminals
Ground terminal
Fix the controlcable with a tie
wrap
Connect theshield to
the terminal
Utility cableterminals
DC-link/brakeresisotr terminalsMotor cableterminals
Ground terminals
Rubber grommets
L1 L2 L3 - + U V W
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
Motor cableBrake resistor cable
Control cableUtility cable m5IP21
![Page 40: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Page 36 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-6 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 12: 15 - 25 Hp voltage code 5 and 5 - 15 Hp code 2
Control card
I/O terminals
Ground terminal
Connect theshield to
the terminal
Internalcooling fan
Utility cableterminalsDC-link/brakeresistor terminals
Motor cableterminals
Rubber grommets
Motor cableBrake resistor cable
Control cableUtility cable
Ch5IP54
L1 L2 L3 - + U V W
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
![Page 41: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
HV9000 Page 37 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-7 Cable assembly for open chassis: 30 - 75 Hp voltage code 5 and 20 - 40 Hp code 2
Control cable
Utility cableterminals(L1, L2, L3)
Cable cover
Brake resistor cable
Fixing screw Fixing screw
Motor cableterminals
Power card
Control card
Control I/Oterminals
Connect theshield to theterminal
Fix the controlcable with a tiewrap
Groundterminals
(PE)
Utility cable
DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–,+)
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
L1 L2 L3 – + U V W
![Page 42: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Page 38 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-8 Cable assembly for Standard NEMA 1 30 - 75 Hp voltage code 5 and 20 - 40 Hp code 2
Control cable
Utility cableterminals
Motor Cable
Brake resistor cable
Rubber grommets
Ground terminals
Motor cableterminals
Control cardI/O terminals
Connect theshield to theterminal
Fix the controlcable with a tiewrap
Ground terminal
Utility cable
DC-link/Brakeresistor terminals
L1 L2 L3 - + U V W
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
![Page 43: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
HV9000 Page 39 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-9 Cable assembly for open chassis: 100 - 150 Hp voltage code 5 and 50 - 75 Hp code 2
Control cableMotor Cable
Brake resistorcable
Motor cableterminals
Control cardPower card
Utility cable
Utility cableterminals
(L1, L2, L3)
Control I/Oterminals
Connect the screento the terminal
Fix the control cablewith a tie wrap
Groundterminals
(PE)
DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals (–, +)
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
L1 L2 L3
– + U V W
![Page 44: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
Page 40 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-10 Cable assembly for open chassis 200 - 400 Hp voltage code 5, 125 - 400 Hp code 6and 100 Hp code 2; for NEMA 1 200 - 400 Hp code 5 and NEMA 1 100 Hp code 2.
Controlcable
MotorCable
Terminalisolatorplates
Control I/Oterminals
Control cablegrounding
Control cablefixing
Insulated(yellow-green)groundingconductor twistedof cable shield
PE terminalsfor utility andmotor cables
Utilitycable
DC-link/Brakeresistorterminals
L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +
Ch9KYTK2
![Page 45: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
HV9000 Page 41 (78)
6
Figure 6.1.4-11 Cable cover and terminal assembly for open chassis 200 - 400 Hp voltage code 5,125 - 400 Hp code 6, and 100 Hp code 2; and NEMA 1 200 - 400 Hp code 5 and 100Hp code 2
Wiring
Fixing screws of protective covers
After cable connections before swtich on the utioity supply, enusre:
1. Insert all 10 terminal isolator plates (A) in the slots between the terminals,see figure below
2. Insert and fiz three plastic protective covers (B, C, and D) over theterminals
Bend the plate tofit it into a slot.Release to lock itin correct position
Inser plateinto the slots
Terminal isolation plates
Securing the terminal isolation plates
B C A D
Ch9SUOJAT
L1 L2 L3 U V W – + + +
![Page 46: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Page 42 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-12 Cable assembly for open chassis 3 - 30 Hp voltage code 6
Control cable
Utility cable
Motor Cable
Brake resistor cable
Control card
Control I/Oterminals
Connect theshield tothe terminal
Ground terminal Ground terminal
Utility cableterminalsDC-link/Brakeresistor terminalsMotor cableterminalsL1 L2 L3 - + U V WL1 L2 L3
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425
Ch5CX6
![Page 47: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
HV9000 Page 43 (78)
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-13 Cable assembly for open chassis 40 - 100 Hp voltage code 6
Control cableUtility cable
Motor Cable
Brake resistor cable
Control card
I/O terminals
Connect theshield tothe terminal
Ground terminal Ground terminal
Utility cableterminalsDC-link/Brakeresistor terminalsMotor cableterminals
Ch6CX6
– + U V WL1 L2 L3
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
![Page 48: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
Page 44 (78) HV9000
6
Wiring
Figure 6.1.4-14 Cable assembly Compact NEMA 1 1 - 3 Hp, voltage code 2,1-5 Hp voltage code 5
Utility cableterminals(L1, L2, L3)
Motor cableterminals(U, V, W)
Utility cable Motor cable
Yellow-greenprotectivecable
Yellow-greenprotectivecable
Groundterminal
DC-link/brakeresistorterminals (–, +)
Ground terminalfor the control cable
![Page 49: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
HV9000 Page 45 (78)
6
Figure 6.1.4-15 Cable assembly for Compact NEMA1 5 - 10 voltage code 2 and 7.5 - 20 Hp voltage code 5
Wiring
Utility cableterminals(L1, L2, L3)
Motor cableterminals(U, V, W)
Utility cable
Motorcable
Yellow-greenprotectivecable
Groundterminal
Ground terminalfor the control cable
Motor cable
DC-link/brakeresistorterminals (–, +)
Groundterminal
![Page 50: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
Page 46 (78) HV9000
6
6.2 Control connections
Basic connection diagram is shown in thefigure 6.2-1.
The functionality of the terminals for the Basicapplication is explained in chapter 10.2. If oneof the HVReady applications is selected,check the application manual for thefunctionality of the terminals for that application.
6.2.1 Control cables
The control cables should be minimum of #20gauge shielded multicore cables, see table6.1-1. The maximum wire size rating of theterminals is #14.
6.2.2 Galvanic isolation barriers
The control connections are isolated from theutility potential and the I/O ground is connectedto the frame of the HV9000 via a 1 MΩ resistorand 4.7 nF capacitor. The control I/O groundcan also be connected directly to the frame,by changing the position of the jumper X4 toON-position, see figure 6.2.2-1.
Digital inputs and relay outputs are isolatedfrom the I/O ground.
6.1.5 Cable and motor insulation checks
1 Motor cable insulation checks
Disconnect the motor cable from theterminals U, V and W of the HV9000 unitand from the motor.
Measure the insulation resistance of themotor cable between each phaseconductor. Also measure the insulationresistance between each phaseconductor and the protective groundconductor.The insulation resistance must be >1MΩ.
2 Utility cable insulation checks
Disconnect the utility cable fromterminals L1, L2 and L3 of the HV9000unit and from the utility.
Measure the insulation resistance of theutility cable between each phaseconductor. Also measure the insulationresistance between each phaseconductor and the protective groundconductor. The insulation resistancemust be >1MΩ.
3 Motor insulation checks
Disconnect the motor cable from themotor and open any bridgingconnections in the motor connection box.
Measure insulation resistance of eachmotor winding. The measurementvoltage has to be at least equal to the utilityvoltage but not exceed 1000V.The insulation resistance must be >1MΩ.
Wiring
![Page 51: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
HV9000 Page 47 (78)
6
Terminal Function Specification
1 +10Vref Reference voltage output Burden max 10 mA *
2 Vin+ Analog signal input Signal range -10 V— +10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground
4 Iin+ Analog signal (+input) Signal range 0(4)—20 mA
5 Iin- Analog signal (-input)
6 24V out 24V supply voltage ±20%, load max. 100 mA
7 GND I/O ground
8 DIA1 Digital input 1 Ri = min. 5 kΩ
9 DIA2 Digital input 2
10 DIA3 Digital input 3
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Must be connected to GND or 24V ofI/O- terminal or to external 24V or GND
12 24V out 24V supply voltage Same as terminal # 6
13 GND I/O ground Same as terminal # 7
14 DIB4 Digital input 4 Ri = min. 5 kΩ
15 DIB5 Digital input 5
16 DIB6 Digital input 6
17 CMB Common for DIB4 — DIB6 Must be connected to GND or 24V ofI/O- terminal or to external 24V or GND
18 Iout+ Analog signal (+output) Signal range 0(4)—20 mA,
19 Iout- Analog ground (-output) RL max. 500 Ω
20 DO1 Open collector output Transistor output, max. Vin = 48 VDCmax. current 50 mA
21 RO1/1 Relay output 1 Max. switch. voltage 250 VAC, 300 VDC
22 RO1/2 Max switch. current 8 A / 24 VDC,
23 RO1/3 0.4 A / 250 VDC
24 RO2/1 Relay output 2 Max. switch. power <2 kVA / 250 VAC
25 RO2/2 Max. cont. current <2 A rms
26 RO2/3
Wiring
Figure 6.2-1 Control I/O-terminal signals.
* If the potentiometer reference is used, potentiometer R = 1—10 kΩ
![Page 52: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
Page 48 (78) HV9000
6
The +24V or ground for the digital inputs andcommon terminals (CMA, CMB) can be eitherexternal or internal (terminals 6 and 12 of thedrive).
Positive logic (+24 V active signal) = input is active when the switch is closed.
Negative logic (0 V active signal) = input is active when the switch is closed.
DIA1
DIA2
DIA3
CMA
DIA1
DIA2
DIA3
CMA
+24 V
Ground (-)
Ground (-)
+24 V
6.2.3 Digital input function inversion
The active signal level of the digital input logicdepends on how the common input (CMA,CMB) of the input group is connected. Theconnection can be either to +24 V or to ground.See figure 6.2.3-1.
Wiring
Figure 6.2.3-1 Positive/negative logic.
Figure 6.2.2-1 Isolation barriers.
X4
1 MΩ
DIA1
DIA3
DO1
RO1.1RO1.2RO1.3
RO2.1RO2.2RO2.3
...
DIB4
DIB6CMB
...
K6_2_2_1
U V W
L1 L2 L3
Control I/O ground
Digital inputgroup A
Analogoutput
Digital output
10 Vref.GND
+24 VGND
Main circuits
Motor
Mains
Digital inputgroup B
Iout +Iout -
Uin
Iin + Iin -
![Page 53: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 49 (78)
7
7. CONTROL PANEL
7.1 Introduction
The control panel of the HV9000 drivehas a Multiline Display with sevenindicators for the Run status
(RUN, , , READY, STOP,
ALARM, FAULT) and two indicators forthe control source (Panel/Remote). Thepanel also has three text lines for themenu location, menu/submenudescriptions and the number of thesubmenus or the value of the monitored
item. The eight pushbuttons on thecontrol panel are used for controlling thedrive, setting parameters and monitoringvalues.The panel is detachable and isolatedfrom the utility line potential.The display examples in this chaptershow only the text and numeric lines ofthe Multiline Display. The Run statusindicators are not included in theexamples.
DRIVE STATUS INDICATORS
RUN = lights when motor is running.
= shows the selected rotation.
STOP = lights when motor is not running.
READY = lights when input voltage issupplied and the unit is readyfor use.
FAULT = lights when a fault in frequencydrive occurs.
Panel/Remote = Shows the active control source.
= Menu button (left)Move forward in the menu
Menu button (right)Move backward in the menu
=
=
Browser button (up)Move in the main menu and betweenpages inside the same submenu.Change value.
= Browser button (down)Move in the main menu and betweenpages inside the same submenu.Change value.
= Enter buttonAcknowledgement of changed value.Fault history reset.Function as programmable button.
= Reset buttonFault resetting
= Start buttonStarts the motor if the panel is theactive control source
= Stop buttonStops the motor if the panel is theactive control source
ENTER
RESET
UP
DOWN
STOP
START
Figure 7.1-1 Control panel with LED display.
![Page 54: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Page 50 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7
7.2 Control panel operation
The data on the panel are arranged inmenus and submenus. The menus are usedto display and edit measurement andcontrol signals, set parameters andreference values, and display faults.Through the menus you can also adjust thecontrast of the display and use theprogrammable buttons.
The desired submenu is accessed from the
main menu using the Menu buttons. Thesymbol M on the first text line stands for themain menu. It is followed by a number thatrefers to the submenu in question. See theHV9000 User's Manual and the ApplicationManual for the specific parametersavailable for the needed setup.The arrow ( ) in the lower right cornerindicates that a further submenu can beaccessed by pressing the Menu button(right).
M6Fault History F 1-9
H12. Overvoltage ENTER
2-3 s
M5Active Faults F 1-9
F11. Overcurrent Scroll the active fault list
M4Buttons B1-4
B1Reverse 1
B2 Panel Control
M3Reference R1
R1Freq.reference 122.45 Hz
M2Parameter G 1-12
G1Basic Param. P 1-15
M1Monitor V 1-20
V1Output frequency 122.44 Hz
G2 Special param.
G12
V2 Motor Speed
V20 Motor temp. rise
M7Contrast 15
C1Contrast 15
Fault history reset
B1Reverse 0
R1Freq.reference 122.45 Hz
P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz
ENTER
P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz ENTER
Figure 7.2-1 Panel operation.
![Page 55: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 51 (78)
7
7.3 Monitoring menu
The monitoring menu can be enteredfrom the main menu when the symbolM1 is visible on the first line of theMultiline display. How to browse throughthe monitored values is presented inFigure 7.3-1. All monitored
signals are listed in Table 7.3-1. Thevalues are updated once every 0.5seconds. This menu is meant only forsignal checking. The values cannot bealtered here. See 7.4 Parameter groupmenu.
Table 7.3-1 Monitored signals.Table 7.3-1 Monitored signals
Number Signal name Unit Description
V1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor
V2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed
V3 Motor current A Measured motor current
V4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of
the unit
V5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the
unit
V6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage
V7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage
V8 Temperature ºC Heat sink temperature
V9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days1 , not resettable
V10 Operating hours, “trip counter” HH.hh Operating hours2 , can be resetwith programmable button #3
V11 MW hours counter MWh Total MWh, not resettable
V12 MW hours, “trip counter” MWh Resettable with programmable buttonB4, section 7.6
V13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage of terminal Vin+ (term. #2)
V14 Current/analog input mA Current of terms Iin+ & Iin- (term. #4, 5)V15 Digital input status, gr. A See Figure 7.3-2
V16 Digital input status, gr. B See Figure 7.3-3
V17 Digital and relay output status See Figure 7.3-4
V18 Control program Version number of the control software
V19 Unit nominal power HP Unit power size of the unit
V20 Motor temperature rise % 100% = nominal motor temperature hasbeen reached.
1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of day 2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of hour
M1Monitor V 1-20
V1Output frequency 122.44 Hz
V2 Motor Speed
V20 Motor temp. rise
Figure 7.3-1 Monitoring menu.
![Page 56: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
Page 52 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7V16Dig input B Stat101
Example:Input Terminal
DIB4 14closed
DIB5 15open
DIB6 16closed
V17Dig & Rel Output001
Example:Input Terminal
Digital output 20closed (sinking current)
Relay output 1 21open
Relay output 2 24open
Figure 7.3-2 Digital inputs, Group A status.
Figure 7.3-3 Digital inputs, Group B status.
Figure 7.3-4 Output signal status.
V15Dig input A Stat011
Example:Input Terminal
Digital input statusindication
0 = open input1 = closed input (active)
DIA1 8closed
DIA2 9closed
DIA3 10open
![Page 57: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 53 (78)
7
7.4 Parameter group menu
The parameter group menu can beentered from the main menu when thesymbol M2 is visible on the first line ofthe Multiline display. Parameter valuesare changed in the parameter menu asshown in Figure 7.4-1:
Push the menu button (right) once tomove into the parameter group menu(G) and twice to enter the desiredparameter menu. Locate the parameteryou want to change by using the browserbuttons. Push the menu button (right)once again to enter the edit menu. Onceyou are in the edit menu, the symbol ofthe parameter starts to blink. Set thedesired new value with the browserbuttons and confirm the change bypushing the Enter button. Consequently,the blinking stops and the new value isvisible in the value field. The value willnot change unless the Enter button ispushed.
Several parameters are locked, i.e.uneditable, when the drive is in RUNstatus. If you try to change the value ofsuch a parameter, the text *locked* willappear on the display.You can return to the main menuanytime by pressing the Menu button(left) for 2-3 seconds.
The basic application embodies onlythose parameters necessary foroperating the device. The parametergroup 0 is accessible only by openingthe Application package lock. SeeChapter 11 of the HV9000 User'sManual.
Other applications include moreparameter groups.
Once in the last parameter of aparameter group, you can move directlyto the first parameter of that group bypressing the browser button (up).
M2Parameter G 1-12
ENTER
ENTER
G1Basic Param. P1-15
G2.. Special param..G12
P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz
P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz
P1.1Min. frequency 12.34 Hz
P1.2...P12.xChange
value
Figure 7.5-1 Reference setting on the control panel
![Page 58: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
Page 54 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7
7.5 Reference menu
The reference menu can be enteredfrom the main menu when the symbolM3 is visible on the first line of theMultiline panel.
If the control panel is the active controlsource, the frequency reference can bechanged by changing the value on thedisplay with the browser buttons (for theselection of the active control source,see Chapter 7.6 Programmable push-
button menu). See Figure 7.5-1.Move deeper in the menu with the menubutton (right) until the symbol R1 startsto blink. Now you are able to alter thefrequency reference value with thebrowser buttons. Pressing the Enterbutton is not necessary. Motor speedchanges as soon as the frequencyreference changes or the load inertiaallows the motor to accelerate ordecelerate.In some applications, there might beseveral references.
Figure 7.5-1 Reference setting on the control panel
M3Reference R1
R1Freq. reference122.45 Hz
R1Freq. reference122.45 Hz
![Page 59: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 55 (78)
7
7.6 Programmable push-button menu
The programmable push-button menucan be entered from the main menuwhen the symbol M4 is visible on thefirst line of the Multiline display. In thismenu, there are four functions for theEnter button. The functions are availablein this menu only. In other menus, thebutton is used for its original purpose.The status of the controlled function isshown through a feedback signal.
Enter the edit menu with the menu but-ton (right). Then, the symbol B1 starts to
blink. To change the button value, pushthe Enter button after which the newfeedback value appears and the buttonsign B is replaced with a black squareblinking together with the button number.After releasing the Enter button, theblack square reverts to B. The new valuestops blinking when the new value (e.g.reverse direction) has been received andput into operation. See Figure 7.6-1.
Figure 7.6-1 Programmable push-button
Table 7.6-1 Programmable push-button descriptions
M4Buttons B1-4
B1Reverse 1
1Reverse 0
B1Reverse
B1Reverse 0
0
Value c
hange pro
cedure
ENTER
B1Reverse 1
B2 Panel Control...
nottuBrebmuN
nottuBnoitpircseD noitcnuF
noitamrofnikcabdeeF0 1 etoN
1B esreveR noitatorehtsegnahC.rotomehtfonoitcerid
nehwylnoelbaliavAehtsilenaplortnoceht
.ecruoslortnocevtica
drawroF esreveR noitamrofnikcabdeeFehtsagnolsasehsalf
deirracsidnammoc.tuo
2B evitcAlortnoc
O/IneewtebnoitceleSlortnocdnaslanimret
.lenap
aivlortnoCslanimretO/I
morflortnoClenapeht
3B gnitarepOpirt,sruoh
retnuocteser
gnitarepoehtsteseRretnuocpirtsruoh
.dehsupnehw
gnitteseroN ehtsteseRgnitarepopirtsruoh
retnuoc4B hWM
retnuocteser
pirthWMehtsteseR.dehsupnehwretnuoc
gnitteseroN ehtsteseRpirthWM
retnuoc
![Page 60: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
Page 56 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7
7.7 Active faults menu
The active faults menu can be entered fromthe main menu when the symbol M5 isvisible on the first line of the Multiline displayas shown in Figure 7.7-1.
When a fault brings the frequency converterto a stop, the fault code (F#) and the descrip-tion of the fault are displayed. If there are sev-eral faults at the same time, the list of activefaults can be browsed with the browser but-tons.
Figure 7.7-1 Active faults menu
The display can be cleared with the Resetbutton and the read-out will return to the samedisplay it had before the fault trip.
The fault remains active until it is cleared withReset button or with a reset signal from theI/O terminal.
Note! Remove any external Start signal be-fore resetting the fault to prevent an unin-tentional restart.
Scroll the activefault list
CLEARWITH
RESETF11. Overcurrent
M5Active Faults F1-9
Table 7.7-1 Fault codes
tluaFsedoc
tluaF esuaCelbissoP gnikcehC
1F tnerrucrevO sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHehtni)nI*4>(tnerrucahgihootderusaem
:tuptuorotomesaercnidaolyvaehneddus-
selbacrotomehtnitiucrictrohs-rotomelbatiusnu-
gnidaolkcehCezisrotomkcehC
selbackcehC
2F egatlovrevO ehtfoknil-CDlanretniehtfoegatlovehTsahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH
%53ybegatlovlanimonehtdedeecxetsafootsiemitnoitareleced-
ytilitutasekipsegatlovrevohgih-
emitnoitarelecedehttsujdA
3F tluafdnuorG ehttahtdetcetedtnemerusaemtnerruCtonsitnerrucesahprotomehtfomus
orezehtrorotomehtnieruliafnoitalusni-
selbac
selbacrotomehtkcehC
4F tluafretrevnI sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHetagehtninoitarepoytluafdetceted
egdirbTBGIrosrevirdtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
sruccotluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseR.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniaga
5F hctiwsgnigrahC TRATSnehwnepohctiwsgnigrahCevitcadnammoc
tluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
sruccotluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseR.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniaga
9F egatlovrednU fo%56wolebenogsahegatlovsub-CDegatlovlanimoneht
ehtfoeruliafsinosaernommoctsom-ylppusytilitu
ycneuqerf0009VHehtfoeruliaflanretni-naesuacoslanacretrevnoc
pirtegatlovrednu
teser,kaerbegatlovylppusyraropmetfoesacnI.niagatratsdnatluafeht
.tupniytilitukcehCsaheruliaflanretninatcerrocsiylppusytilitufI
.derrucco.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
01F eniltupnInoisivrepus
gnissimsiesahpeniltupnI noitcennocyitlituehtkcehC
11F esahptuptuOnoisivrepus
tahtdetcetedsahtnemerusaemtnerruCesahprotomenonitneruconsiereht
selbacrotomkcehC
21F reppohcekarBnoisivrepus
dellatsnitonrotsiserekarb-nekorbrotsiserekarb-nekorbreppohcekarb-
rotsiserekarbkcehCtcatnoC.nekorbsireppohcehtKOsirotsiserfI
rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoy
31F 0009VHerutarepmetrednu
wolebknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°01-
![Page 61: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 57 (78)
7
Table 7.7-1 Fault codes (cont.)
tluaFsedoc
tluaF esuaCelbissoP gnikcehC
41F 0009VHerutarepmetrevo
C°57revoknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°08revo1ameNtcapmoCroF
wolfriagniloocehtkcehCytridtonsiknistaehehttahtkcehC
erutarepmettneibmakcehChgihoottonsiycneuqerfgnihctiwsehttahtkcehC
rotomdnaerutarepmettneibmahtiwderapmocdaol
51F dellatsrotoM deppirtsahnoitcetorpllatsrotomehT rotomehtkcehC
61F rotoMerutarepmetrevo
rotomevirdycneuqerf0009VHehTrotomdetcetedsahledomerutarepmet
taehrevodedaolrevosirotom-
.daolrotomesaerceDehtfisretemarapledomerutarepmetehtkcehC
detaehrevotonsawrotom
71F daolrednurotoM sahnoitcetorpdaolrednurotomehTdeppirt
.cte,stlebelbissopdnarotomehtkcehC
81F tupnigolanAtluaferawdrah
draoblortnocnoeruliaftnenopmoC rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
91F daobnoitpOnoitacifitnedi
deliafsahdraobnoitpoehtfognidaeR noitallatsniehtkcehCruoytcatnoc,tcerrocsinoitallatsnifI-
rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC
02F egatlovV01ecnerefer
draoblortnocnodetrohsecnereferV01+draobnoitporo
egatlovecnereferV01+morfgnilbacehtkcehC
12F ylppusV42 rodraoblortnocnodetrohsylppusV42+draobnoitpo
egatlovecnereferV42+morfgnilbacehtkcehC
22F32F
MORPEEtluafmuskcehc
rorregnirotserretemaraPtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
yllacitamotualliwevirdehttluafsihtgnittesernOllakcehC.sgnittestluafedretemarapehtdaol
.teserretfasgnittesretemarap-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasruccotluafehtehtfI
rotubirtsidremmaH
52F rossecorporciMgodhctaw
tluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
niagasruccotluafehtfI.tratserdnatluafehtteseRrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoc
62F lenaPnoitacinummoc
rorre
ehtdnalenapneewtebnoitcennocehTgnikrowtonsievirdycneuqerf0009VH
elbaclenapehtkcehC
92F rotsimrehTnoitcetorp
rednapxeO/IehtfotupnirotsimrehTrotomehtfoesaercnidetcetedsahdraob
erutarepmet
gnidaoldnagniloocrotomkcehCnoitcennocrotsimrehtehtkcehC
stupniehterusekam,srotsimrehtoneraerehtfIdetiucrictrohsera
63F ItupnigolanA ni <langis(Am4
detcelesegnar)Am02-4
LtnerructupnigolanaehT ni Am4wolebsideliafsahecruoslangis-
nekorbsielbaclortnoc-
yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC
14F tluaflanretxE ehttadetcetedneebsahtluaflanretxenAtupnilatigid
ecruostluaflanretxeehtkcehC
![Page 62: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
Page 58 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7
7.8 Fault history menu
The fault history menu can be entered fromthe main menu when the symbol M6 isdisplayed on the first line of the Multilinepanel.The memory of the drive can store the up tothe 9 latest faults in the order ofappearance. The most recent fault has thenumber 1, the second latest number 2 etc.If there are 9 uncleared faults in the
memory, the next fault will erase the oldestfrom the memory.Pressing the Enter button for about 2…3seconds will reset the whole fault history.Then the symbol F# will change to 0.
Figure 7.8-1. Fault history menu
7.9 Contrast menu
The contrast menu can be entered from themain menu when the symbol M7 is visibleon the first line of the Multiline display.Use the menu button (right) to enter the editmenu. You are in the edit menu when the
symbol C starts to blink. Then change thecontrast using the browser buttons. Thechanges take effect immediately.
Figure 7.9-1. Contrast setting
ENTER2-3s
H12. Overvoltage
M6Fault History F 1-9
Fault history reset
CContrast 15
M7Contrast 15
![Page 63: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
HV9000 Control Panel Page 59 (78)
7
7.10 Active warning display
When a warning occurs, a text with asymbol A# appears on the display.Warning codes are explained in Table7.10-1.The display does not have to be cleared
in any special way.The warning on the display does notdisable the normal functions of the pushbuttons.
Table 7.10-1 Warning codes
edoC gninraW gnikcehC
51A .)noitcetorpllatsrotoM(dellatsrotoM .rotomkcehC
61A .)noitcetorplamrehtrotoM(erutarepmetrevorotoM .gnidaolrotomkcehC
71A nidetavitcaebnacgninraW(daolrednurotoM.)snoitacilppaydaeRVH
.gnidaolrotomkcehC
42A rosretnuochWM,yrotsiHtluaFehtniseulavehTneebevahthgimsretnuocruoh/yadgnitarepo
.noitpurretnisniamsuoiverpehtnidegnahc
lacitircaekaT.snoitcaynadeentonseoD.seulavesehtotedutitta
82A .deliafsahnoitacilppafoegnahcehT ehthsupdnaniaganoitacilppaahtesoohC.nottubretnE
03A sistnemgesehtfodaoleht:tluaftnerrucecnalabnU.lauqeton
.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
54A erutarepmetrevoretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH.C°07>erutarepmeT:gninraw
tneibmaehtdnawolfriagniloocehtkcehC.erutarepmet
64A Am4<+niItupnifotnerruceht;gninrawecnerefeR)snoitacilppaydaeRVHnidetavitcaebnacgninraW(
.yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC
74A nidetavitcaebnacgninraW(;gninrawlanretxEsnoitacilppaydaeRVH
.ecivedrotiucrictluaflanretxeehtkcehC
![Page 64: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Page 60 (78) Control Panel HV9000
7
7.11 Controlling the motor from the panel
The HV9000 can be controlled from either theI/O terminals or the control panel. The activecontrol source can be changed with theprogrammable push button b2 (see chapter7.6). The motor can be started, stopped andthe direction of rotation can be changed fromthe active control source.
7.11.1 Control source change from I/O terminals to the panel
After changing the control source the motor isstopped. The direction of rotation remains thesame as with I/O control.
If the Start button is pushed at the same timeas the programmable pushbutton B2, the Runstate, direction of rotation and reference valueare copied from the I/O terminals to the panel.
7.11.2 Control source change from panelto I/O
After changing the control source, the I/Oterminals determine the run state, direction ofrotation and reference value.
If the motor potentiometer is used in theapplication, the panel reference value can becopied as the motor potentiometer referenceby pushing the start button at the same timeas the programmable push button B2. Themotor potentiometer function mode must be"resetting at stop state" (Local/RemoteApplication: param. 1. 5 =4, Multi-purposeApplication : param. 1. 5 = 9).
![Page 65: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
HV9000 Page 61 (78)
Internal components and circuit boards (except the isolated I/Oterminals) are at line potential when the HV9000 drive is connectedto the utility. This voltage is extremely dangerous and may causedeath or severe injury if you come in contact with it.
When the HV9000 drive is connected to the utility, the motorconnections U, V, W and DC-link / brake resistor connections -,+ arelive even if the motor is not running.
Do not make any connections when the HV9000 drive is connected tothe utility line.
After disconnecting the utility, wait until the cooling fan on the unitstops and the indicators in the panel are turned off (if no panel checkthe indicators on the cover). Wait at least 5 minutes before doingany work on the HV9000 drive connections. Do not open coverbefore this time has run out.
The control I/O terminals are isolated from the utility potential but therelay outputs and other I/O:s (if jumper X4 is in the OFF position,see fig. 6.2.2-1) may have dangerous external voltages connectedeven if the power is off from the HV9000 drive.
Before connecting the utility make sure that the cover of the HV9000drive is closed.
8 STARTUP
8.1 Safety precautions
Before startup, observe the following warnings and instructions:
1
!
2
34
5
6
8.2 Sequence of operation
1 Read and follow the safety precautions
2 After installation ensure that the:
- Drive and motor are connected to ground.
- Utility and motor cables are in accordance with the installation andconnection instructions (chapter 6.1).
- Control cables are located as far as possible from the power cables(table 6.1.3-1), shields of the control cables are connectedto the protective ground and wires do not have contact with anyelectrical components in the HV9000.
- The common input of digital input groups is connected to +24 V orground of the I/O-terminal or external supply (See 6.2.3)
8
Startup
![Page 66: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Page 62 (78) HV9000
3 Check the quantity and quality of the cooling air (chapters 5.1 and 5.2).
4 Check that moisture has not condensed inside the HV9000 drive.
5 Check that all Start/Stop switches connected to the I/O terminals are in the Stop state.
6 Connect the HV9000 to the utility and switch the power ON.
7 Ensure that the parameters of the Group 1 match the application.
Set the following parameters to match the motor nameplate:
- nominal voltage of the motor- nominal frequency of the motor- nominal speed of the motor- nominal current of the motor- supply voltage
Look up the values from the nameplate of the motor.
8 Start-up test without motor
Perform either test A or B:
A Control from the I/O terminals:
- turn Start/Stop switch to ON position
- change the frequency reference
- check from the Monitoring page of the control panel that theoutput frequency follows the frequency reference
- turn Start/Stop switch to OFF position
B Control from the Control Panel:
- change control from the I/O terminals to the control panel withthe programmable button B2, see chapter 7.6.
- push the Start button
- go to the Reference Page and change the frequency referencewith the buttons , see chapter 7.5
- go to the Monitoring Page and check that the output frequencyfollows the reference, see chapter 7.3.
- push the Stop button
9 If possible, make a start-up test with a motor which is not connected to the process.If the inverter has to be tested on a motor connected to the process, ensure it is safe tobe powered up. Inform all possible co-workers about the tests.
- switch the utility power OFF and wait until the HV9000 haspowered down according to chapter 8.1/ point 4
8
Startup
![Page 67: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
HV9000 Page 63 (78)
- connect the motor cable to the motor and the power terminals ofthe HV9000
- check that all start/stop switches connected to the I/O terminalsare in the OFF state
- switch the utility power ON
- repeat test A or B of the test #8.
10 Connect the motor to the process (if the previous tests were done without the process)
- ensure it is safe to power up- inform all possible co-workers about the tests.- repeat test A or B of the test #8.
8
Startup
![Page 68: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
Page 64 (78) HV9000
9 FAULT TRACING
When a fault trip occurs, the fault indicatoris illuminated and the fault code and itsdescription are displayed. The fault canbe cleared with the Reset button or via anI/O terminal. The faults are stored to thefault history from where they can beviewed (see chapter 7.8). The fault codesare explained in table 9-1.
9
tluaFsedoc
tluaF esuaCelbissoP gnikcehC
1F tnerrucrevO sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VH)nI*4>(tnerrucahgihootderusaem
:tuptuorotomehtniesaercnidaolyvaehneddus-
selbacrotomehtnitiucrictrohs-rotomelbatiusnu-
gnidaolkcehCezisrotomkcehC
selbackcehC
2F egatlovrevO foknil-CDlanretniehtfoegatlovehTsahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHeht
ybegatlovlanimonehtdedeecxe%53
tsafootsiemitnoitareleced-ytilitutasekipsegatlovrevohgih-
emitnoitarelecedehttsujdA
3F tluafdnuorG tahtdetcetedtnemerusaemtnerruCtnerrucesahprotomehtfomuseht
oreztonsiehtrorotomehtnieruliafnoitalusni-
selbac
selbacrotomehtkcehC
4F tluafretrevnI sahretrevnocycneuqerf0009VHetagehtninoitarepoytluafdetceted
egdirbTBGIrosrevirdtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
tluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco
.rotubirtsid
5F hctiwsgnigrahC TRATSnehwnepohctiwsgnigrahCevitcadnammoc
tluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
tluafehtfI.niagatratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco
.rotubirtsid
9F egatlovrednU wolebenogsahegatlovsub-CDegatlovlanimonehtfo%56
foeruliafsinosaernommoctsom-ylppusytilitueht
0009VHehtfoeruliaflanretni-esuacoslanacretrevnocycneuqerf
pirtegatlovrednuna
,kaerbegatlovylppusyraropmetfoesacnI.niagatratsdnatluafehtteser
.tupniytilitukcehCeruliaflanretninatcerrocsiylppusytilitufI
.derruccosah.rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
01F eniltupnInoisivrepus
gnissimsiesahpeniltupnI noitcennocyitlituehtkcehC
11F esahptuptuOnoisivrepus
detcetedsahtnemerusaemtnerruCrotomenonitneruconsierehttaht
esahp
selbacrotomkcehC
21F reppohcekarBnoisivrepus
dellatsnitonrotsiserekarb-nekorbrotsiserekarb-nekorbreppohcekarb-
rotsiserekarbkcehC.nekorbsireppohcehtKOsirotsiserfIrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
31F 0009VHerutarepmetrednu
wolebknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°01-
Fault Tracing
![Page 69: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
HV9000 Page 65 (78)
9
tluaFsedoc
tluaF esuaCelbissoP gnikcehC
41F 0009VHerutarepmetrevo
C°57revoknistaehfoerutarepmeTC°08revo1ameNtcapmoCroF
wolfriagniloocehtkcehCytridtonsiknistaehehttahtkcehC
erutarepmettneibmakcehCtonsiycneuqerfgnihctiwsehttahtkcehC
tneibmahtiwderapmochgihootdaolrotomdnaerutarepmet
51F dellatsrotoM deppirtsahnoitcetorpllatsrotomehT rotomehtkcehC
61F rotoMerutarepmetrevo
rotomevirdycneuqerf0009VHehTdetcetedsahledomerutarepmet
taehrevorotomdedaolrevosirotom-
.daolrotomesaerceDsretemarapledomerutarepmetehtkcehC
detaehrevotonsawrotomehtfi
71F daolrednurotoM sahnoitcetorpdaolrednurotomehTdeppirt
.cte,stlebelbissopdnarotomehtkcehC
81F tupnigolanAtluaferawdrah
draoblortnocnoeruliaftnenopmoC rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnoC
91F daobnoitpOnoitacifitnedi
sahdraobnoitpoehtfognidaeRdeliaf
noitallatsniehtkcehCruoytcatnoc,tcerrocsinoitallatsnifI-
rotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC
02F egatlovV01ecnerefer
lortnocnodetrohsecnereferV01+draobnoitporodraob
ecnereferV01+morfgnilbacehtkcehCegatlov
12F ylppusV42 lortnocnodetrohsylppusV42+draobnoitporodraob
ecnereferV42+morfgnilbacehtkcehCegatlov
22F32F
MORPEEtluafmuskcehc
rorregnirotserretemaraPtluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
lliwevirdehttluafsihtgnittesernOtluafedretemarapehtdaolyllacitamotua
retfasgnittesretemarapllakcehC.sgnittes.teser
ruoytcatnocniagasruccotluafehtehtfIrotubirtsidremmaH-reltuC
52F rossecorporciMgodhctaw
tluafecnerefretni-eruliaftnenopmoc-
tluafehtfI.tratserdnatluafehtteseRremmaH-reltuCruoytcatnocniagasrucco
rotubirtsid
62F lenaPnoitacinummoc
rorre
dnalenapneewtebnoitcennocehTtonsievirdycneuqerf0009VHeht
gnikrow
elbaclenapehtkcehC
92F rotsimrehTnoitcetorp
rednapxeO/IehtfotupnirotsimrehTehtfoesaercnidetcetedsahdraob
erutarepmetrotom
gnidaoldnagniloocrotomkcehCnoitcennocrotsimrehtehtkcehC
ehterusekam,srotsimrehtoneraerehtfIdetiucrictrohserastupni
63F ItupnigolanA ni <langis(Am4
-4detcelesegnar)Am02
LtnerructupnigolanaehT ni wolebsiAm4
deliafsahecruoslangis-nekorbsielbaclortnoc-
yrtiucricpooltnerrucehtkcehC
14F tluaflanretxE detcetedneebsahtluaflanretxenAtupnilatigidehtta
ecruostluaflanretxeehtkcehC
Fault Tracing
![Page 70: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
Page 66 (78) HV9000
Parameters are explained in chapter 10.4. Thefunction of motor thermal and stall protectionin the Basic Application is explained in chapter10.5.
* NOTE! Remember to connect the CMAand CMB inputs.
10 BASIC APPLICATION
10.1 General
The Basic Application is the default setting asdelivered from the factory. Control I/O signalsof the Basic application are fixed (notprogrammable) and it only has parameterGroup 1.
10.2 Control Connections
10
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref
Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, voltage Frequency reference activated ifrange 0—10 V DC terminals 14 and 15 open and
parameter 1.17 = 0 (default value)
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, current Frequency reference activated if
5 Iin- range 0—20 mA terminals 14 and 15 closed, or open
and parameter 1.17 = 1
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward
9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse
10 DIA3 External fault input Contact open = no faultContact closed = fault
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 DIB4 DIB5 Frequency ref.
15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 open open Ref. Vin (par.1.17=0)closed open Multi-step ref. 1open closed Multi-step ref. 2closed closed Ref. Iin (term. #4,5)
16 DIB6 Fault reset Contact open = no actionContact closed = fault reset
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Analog output 0—20 mA 0 - maximum frequency (par. 1. 2)
19 Iout- Output frequency RL max 500 Ω
20 DO1 Digital output activated = the SV9000READY is ready to operate
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Relay activated = SV9000 is
22 RO1 RUN operating (motor is running)
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Relay activated = fault trip has
25 RO2 FAULT occured
26 RO2
Referencepotentiometer
READY
*
*
Figure 1.2-1 Control connection example.
FAULT220VACMax.
RUN
Basic Application
![Page 71: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
HV9000 Page 67 (78)
10
Basic Application
Figure 10.3-1 Control signal logic
10.3 Control Signal Logic
Figure 10.3.-1 shows the logic of the I/O control signals and push buttons.
If Start forward and Start reverse are both activated when the utility line is connected to the HV9000then Start forward will be selected for the direction.
If Start forward and Start reverse are both activated when the control source is changed fromthe panel to the I/O-terminals then Start forward will be selected for the direction.
If both directions are selected the first selected direction has higher priority than the secondselected.
DIB4
DIB5
DIA1
DIB6
DIA2
DIA3
Vin+
Iin±
Cu er-Ha er
U
DO N
0O
N ER
RR
Cu er-Ha er
U
DO N
0O
N ER
RR
PROGRAMMABLEPUSH-BUTTON 2
Internalfrequencyreference
InternalStart/Stop
Internalfault reset
Internalreverse
Start forward
Fault reset input
Start reverse
External fault input
= control line
Reverse
Start/Stopand reverse
CH012K00
Panel reference
Start/Stop buttons
RST button
Multi-step speed select 2
BASIC PARAMETERS
Group 1
1. 5 Multi-step speed reference 1
1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 2
1. 17 Basic reference selection
Multi-step speed select 1
>1
![Page 72: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Page 68 (78) HV9000
10
10.4 Parameters, Group 1
Num. Parameter Range Step Default Customer Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 69
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 69
1. 3 Acceleration time 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 69
1. 4 Deceleration time 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 69
1. 5 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10 Hz 69reference 1 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 6 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 60 Hz 69reference 2 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A 1.5 x In HV9 Output current limit [A] of the unit 69
1. 8 V/Hz ratio 0 = Linearselection 0—1 1 0 1 = Squared 69
1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 701 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 70of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5600 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 70of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 1—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1710 rpm nn from the nameplate of 70of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 71of the motor (In Mot) the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 71
380—440 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 600 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Application 0—1 1 1 0 = package lock open 71package lock Application is selected by
parameter 0.1
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 710 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled
1. 17 Basic frequency 0—2 1 0 0 = analog input Vin 71reference selection 1 = analog input Iin
2 = reference from the panel
1. 18 Analog input Iin 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 71range 1 = 4—20 mA
* If 1. 2 >motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityof motor and drive system.
** Default value for a four pole motor and a
nominal size HV9000.
Basic Application
Table 10.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters
Note! = Parameter value can be changed only
when the HV9000 is stopped.STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
![Page 73: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
HV9000 Page 69 (78)
10
Basic Application
Figure 10.4.1-1 Example of Multi-step speed references.
10.4.1 Descriptions
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum/maximum frequency
Defines the frequency limits of the HV9000.
Default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz in Stop state (RUN indicator not lit) and pressing the Enter key themaximum value of parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is changed to 500 Hz. At the sametime the panel reference display resolution is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.The max. value is changed from 500 Hz to 120 Hz when parameter 1. 2 is set to119 Hz in Stop state and the Enter key is pressed.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time, deceleration time :
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1. 2).
1. 5, 1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 1, Multi-step speed reference 2:
Parameter values are limited between minimum and maximum frequency.
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 willprovide short term.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency from 0 0 Hz to the nominal frequency of the motor. The nominal voltage of the
motor is supplied at this frequency. See figure 10.4.1-2.
Linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.
This default setting should be used if there is no special requirement foranother setting.
t
f[Hz]
Par. 1. 5
Par. 1. 6
DIB4
DIB5UD012K06
Ref Iin
Ref Vin
Closed
Open
C l o s e d
Open
(Par. 1. 17 = 0)
![Page 74: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
Page 70 (78) HV9000
10
Basic Application
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve from 0 Hz 1 to the nominal frequency of the motor. The Nominal voltage of the motor
is supplied at this frequency. See figure 10.4.1-2.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the nominal frequency and itproduces less torque and electromechanical noise.A squared V/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torquedemand from the load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g.in centrifugal fans and pumps.
Figure 10.4.1-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and
horsepower.Automatic torque boost can be used in applications wherestarting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external coolingfor the motor if the operating temperature rise is too high.
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find the rated voltage Vn from the nameplate of the motor.
Note! If the nominal motor voltage is lower than the supply voltage, checkthat the insulation level of the motor is adequate.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the value fn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find the value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor. The internal motor protectionfunction uses this value as a reference value.
!
V [V]
V n
f [Hz]
Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
Linear
Squared
Field weakening point
![Page 75: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
HV9000 Page 71 (78)
10
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply. Values arepredefined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6 see table 10.4-1.
1. 15 Application package lock
The application package lock can be opened by setting the the value of the parameter1.15 to 0. It will then be possible to enter the parameter group 0 from parameter 1.1by pressing arrow down button (see figure 11-1). The number of the Application canbe selected from the table 11-1 and it is selected by the value of parameter 0.1.After this, the new Application is in use and its parameters will be found in theHVReady Application manual.
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
1. 17 Basic frequency reference selection
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF), see
chapter 7.5.
1. 18 Analog input Iin range
Defines the minimum value of the Analog input Iin signal (terminals 4,5).
Basic Application
![Page 76: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
Page 72 (78) HV9000
10
Basic Application
10.5.2 Motor Stall warning
In the Basic application, motor stall protection gives a warning of a short time overload ofthe motor e.g. a stalled shaft. The reaction time of this stall protection is shorter than themotor thermal protection time. The stall state is defined by Stall Current and StallFrequency.
CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the airflow to themotor is reduced by an air intake grill that is blocked
Figure 10.5.2-1 Stall state.
10.5 Motor protection functions in the Basic Application
10.5.1 Motor thermal protection
Motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. In the Basic application,Motor thermal protection uses constant settings and always causes a fault trip if themotor is overheated. To switch off the protection or to change the settings, seeHVReady application manual.
Your HV9000 is capable of supplyinghigher than nominal current to the motor.If the load requires this high current thereis a risk that motor will be thermallyoverloaded. This is true especially at lowfrequencies, as the cooling effect andthermal capacity of the motor arereduced. The motor thermal protectionis based on a calculated model whichuses the output current of the drive todetermine the load on the motor.
The thermal current IT specifies the loadcurrent above which the motor isoverloaded. See figure 10.5.1-1. If themotor current is above the curve, themotor temperature is increasing.
Both parameters have constant values.See figure 10.5.2-1. If the current ishigher than the set limit and the outputis lower than the set limit the stall stateis true.If the stall state lasts longer than15 s the stall warning is given on thedisplay. To change the stall warning to afault trip or to change the protectionsettings, see the HVReady applicationmanual
Figure 10.5.1-1 Motor thermal current IT curve.
IT
f
I
UMCH7_91
Overload area
Currentlimitpar. 1.7
35 Hz
100%× INmotor
45%× INmotor
I
I
25Hz
130%× I Nmot
Stall area
!
![Page 77: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
11
HV9000 Page 73 (78)System parameter group 0
Group 1 1.18 * * * 1.2 1.1
Group 0 0.2(system 0.1parameters)
Number Parameter Range Description Page
0. 1 Application 1—7 1 = Basic Application 74selection 2 = Standard Application
3 = Local / Remote Control Application4 = Multi-step Speed Application5 = PI-control Application6 = Multi-purpose Control Application7 = Pump and fan control Application
0. 2 Parameter 0—5 0 = Loading ready / Select loading 75loading 1 = Load default settings
2 = Read up parameters to user's set3 = Load down user's set parameters4 = Read parameters up to the panel (possible only with the graphic panel)5 = Load down parameters from the panel (possible only with graphic panel)
0. 3 Language 0—5 0 = English 75selection 1 = German
2 = Swedish3 = Finnish4 = Italian5 = French6 = Spanish
Table 11-1 System parameters, Group 0.
11.2 Parameter descriptions
0.1 Application selection
With this parameter the Application type can be selected. The default setting isthe Basic Application. Applications are described in chapter 12.
11 System parameter group 0
When the application package lock is open(par. 1.15 = 0) the system parameter group0 can be accessed. Parameter group 0 canbe entered from parameter 1.1 by thepressing arrow down button. Theparameters of group 0 are shown in table11-1.
11.1 Parameter table
Figure 11-1 Group 0.
UP
DOWN
![Page 78: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
11
Page 74 (78) HV9000System parameter group 0
0.2 Parameter loading
With this parameter it is possible to do several types of parameter load operations. Afterthe operation is completed this parameter value changes automatically to 0 (loadingready).
0 Loading ready / Select loading
Loading operation has been completed and the drive is ready to operate.
1 Load default settings
By setting the value of parameter 0.2 to 1 and then pressing the Enter-button theparameter default values for the application selected with parameter 0.1 areloaded. Use this when you want to restore the default set.
2 Read up parameters to User's set
Set the value of parameter 0.2 to 2 and press the Enter-button to store the activeparameter values, set A, in back-up memory as the User’s parameter value setB. The parameter values can later be reloaded as the active set by setting pa-rameter 0.2 to 3 and pressing the Enter button. See Figure
3 Load down user's set parameters
Set the value of parameter 0.2 to 3 and press the Enter-button to reload theusers’ set B as the active set A. The User’s set is intended to function as abackup in the case you have a good set of parameters that for some reason islost or changed.See Figure 11-2
4 Read parameters up to the panel (possible only with the graphic panel).
Copies the active parameter set A to the memory in the graphical panel
5 Load down parameters from the panel (possible only with the graphic panel).
Copies the parameter set in the graphical panel as the active parameter set A
NOTE! The panel read and load operations work only on drives of the samesize.
0.3 Language selection
This parameter selects the language of the text displayed on the panel.
Figure 11-2 Relation of the various parameter sets
The defaultvalues
A : The activeparameter set
B: The back-upparameter set
Parameters in thegraphical panel
Default
A B
Panel1
2
3
4
5
![Page 79: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
HV9000 Page 75 (78)HVReady application package
12
12 HVReady application package
12.1 Application Selection
To use one of the HVReady applications, first open the Application package lock (parameter1.15). Group 0 then comes visible (see figure 11-1). Changing the value of parameter 0.1changes the active application. See table 11-1.
Applications are presented in sections 12.2 - 12.7 and in more detail in the following,separate HVReady application manual.
- Programmable V/Hz curve and switchingfrequency
- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully
programmable- Motor Underload protection- Unused analog input functions
12.4 Multi-step Speed Application
The Multi-step Speed Control Applicationcan be used where fixed speed referencesare required. 9 different speeds can beprogrammed: one basic speed, 7 multi-stepspeeds and one jogging speed. The speedsteps are selected with digital signals DIB4,DIB5 and DIB6. If the jogging speed is usedDIA3 can be programmed for jogging speedselect
The basic speed reference can be eithervoltage or current signal via analog inputterminals (2/3 or 4/5). All outputs are freelyprogrammable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/stop and Reversesignal logic
- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching
frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully
programmable- Motor Underload protection- Unused analog input functions
12.2 Standard Application
The Standard Application has the same I/Osignals and same Control logic as the Basicapplication.
Digital input DIA3 and all outputs are freelyprogrammable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/Stop and Reversesignal logic
- Reference scaling- One frequency limit supervision- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S curve- Programmable start and stop functions- DC-braking at stop- One prohibit frequency lockout range- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching
frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection off /
warning / fault programming
12.3 Local/Remote Application
Utilizing the Local/Remote ControlApplication the use of two different controland frequency reference sources isprogrammable. The active control source isselected with digital input DIB6. All outputsare freely programmable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/stop and Reversesignal logic
- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges
![Page 80: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Page 76 (78) HV9000HVReady application package
12
12.5 PI-control Application
In the PI-control Application, there are two I/O-terminal control sources. Source A is aPI-controller and source B is a directfrequency reference. The control source isselected with the DIB6 input.
The PI-controller reference can be selectedfrom the analog inputs, motor potentiometer,or panel reference. The actual value can beselected from the analog inputs or from amathematical function acting on the analoginputs. The direct frequency reference canbe used for control without the PI-controller.The frequency reference can be selectedfrom the analog inputs or the panelreference.
All outputs are freely programmable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/stop and Reversesignal logic
- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching
frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully
programmable- Motor Underload protection
12.6 Multi-purpose Control Application
In the Multi-purpose Control Application, thefrequency reference can be selected fromthe analog inputs, joystick control, motorpotentiometer, or a mathematical function ofthe analog inputs. Multi-step speeds and jogspeed can also be selected if the digitalinputs are programmed for these functions
Digital inputs DIA1 and DIA2 are reservedfor Start/stop logic. Digital inputs DIA3 -DIB6 are programmable for multi-stepspeed select, jog speed select, motorpotentiometer, external fault, ramp timeselect, ramp prohibit, fault reset and DC-brake command function. All outputs arefreely programmable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/stop and Reversesignal logic
- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S-curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching
frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully
programmable- Motor Underload protection- Free analog input functions
12.7 Pump and Fan Control Application
The Pump and Fan Control Application canbe used to control one variable speed driveand 0-3 auxiliary drives. The PI-controller ofthe frequency converter controls the speedof the variable speed drive and gives controlsignals to Start and Stop auxiliary drives tocontrol the total flow.
The application has two control sources onI/O terminal. Source A is Pump and fancontrol and source B is direct frequencyreference. The control source is selectedwith DIB6 input.
All outputs are freely programmable.
Other additonal functions:
- Programmable Start/stop and reversesignal logic
- Analog input signal range selection- Two frequency in band limit indications- Torque in band limit indication- Reference in band limit indication- Second set of ramps and choice of linear
or S curve- DC-braking at start and stop- Three prohibit frequency lockout ranges- Programmable V/Hz curve and switching
frequency- Autorestart function- Motor Thermal and Stall protection fully
programmable- Motor Underload protection
![Page 81: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
HV9000 Page 77 (78)Options
13 Options
13.1 External filters
Information of HV9000 external input andoutput filters (RFI, dV/dT, and Sinusoidal-filters) can be found in their separatemanuals.
13.2 Dynamic braking
Effective motor braking and shortdeceleration times are possible by using anexternal or internal braking chopper with anexternal brake resistor.
The internal braking chopper is assembledin the factory (available in certain models). Ithas the same continuous currentspecification as the unit itself.
Select the correct brake resistor to get thedesired braking effect. More information canbe found in the separate brake manual.
13.3 I/O- expander board
The available I/O can be increased by usingthe I/O- expander boards. I/O-expanderboards can be installed in the option boardposition inside the open, protected, NEMA 1and NEMA 12 HV9000 models. For theCompact NEMA 1 model the board needs tobe installed in a separate I/O-expander box.
More information can be found in the I/O-expander board manuals.
13.4 Communication
HV9000 frequency converters can beconnected to DeviceNet, Modbus RTU,Interbus-S, Profibus-DP and Lonworkssystems by using the fieldbus option board.
The fieldbus board can be installed in theoption board position inside the open,protected, NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 HV9000models. For the compact NEMA 1 model theboard needs to be installed in a separate I/O-expander box.
More information can be found in theseparate communication manuals.
13
13.5 HVGraphic control panel
The HVGraphic control panel can be usedinplace of the standard 3 line LCD panel. Itprovides:
- parameters, monitored items etc. in textformat
- 3 monitored items at the same time indisplay
- one monitored item can be shown inincreased text size with a graph bar
- The selected parameter value is shownon a graph bar
- 3 monitored items can be shown on thegraphical trend display
- the parameters of the frequencyconverter can be uploaded to the paneland then downloaded to another inverter.
More information can be found in theHVGraphicTM Panel manual.
13.6 HVDRIVE
HVDrive is the PC based tool for controland monitoring of the HV9000. WithHVDrive:
- parameters can be loaded from theHV9000, changed, saved to a file orloaded back to the HV9000 - parameterscan be printed to paper or to a file
- references can be set- the motor can be started and stopped- signals can be examined in graphical
form- actual values can be displayed
The HV9000 can be connected to a PCwith a special RS232-cable, catalognumber HVDRIVECABLE. The same cablecan be used for downloading specializedapplications to the HV9000.
13.7 Operator panel door installation kit
An adapter kit is available to mount theoperator display panel on an enclosuredoor.
![Page 82: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
Page 78 (78) HV9000
13.8 Protected chassis cable cover for100-150 HP open panel units
This optional cable cover provides aprotected chassis capability equivalent toIP20.
Notes:
![Page 83: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
HV9000 AF DRIVES
• HV Ready Application Manual
1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM Page 1
![Page 84: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
CONTENTS
A General ..............................................0-2
B Application selection .......................0-2
C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters ....................0-2
D Language selection .........................0-2
1 Standard Control Application ..........1-1
2 Local/Remote Control Application 2-1
3 Multi-step Speed Application ..........3-1
4 PI-control Application ......................4-1
5 Multi-purpose Application ...............5-1
6 Pump and fan control Application ..6-1
HV9000 HVReady APPLICATION MANUAL
HV9000 Page 0-1
![Page 85: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
Page 0-2 HV9000
Table B-1 Application selection parameters.
Besides the parameter group 1, theapplications also have parameter groups 2 —8 available (see figure B-1).
Parameters of the groups sequentially followeach other and changing from the lastparameter of one group to the first parameterof the next group or vice versa is done simplyby pushing the arrow up/arrow down buttons.
Groups 2—8
Group 1
Group 0
Figure B-1 Parameter Groups.
A General
This manual provides you with the informationneeded to apply these applications.
B Application selection
If the Basic Application is in use, first open theapplication package lock (parameter 1.15 = 0)Group 0 appears. By changing the value ofparameter 0.1 a different application can beselected. See table B-1.
Number Parameter Range Description
0. 1 Application 1 —7 1 = Basic Application2 = Standard Application3 = Local / Remote Control Application4 = Multi-step Speed Application5 = PI-control Application6 = Multi-purpose Control Application7 = Pump and Fan Control Application
To change from one application to another,simply change the value of parameter 0.1 tothat of the application desired: see table B-1.
Each application is described in its ownchapter. Section B tells how to select theapplication.
C Restoring default values ofapplication parameters
Default values of the parameters of theapplications 1 to 7 can be restored by selectingthe same application again with parameter 0.1or by setting the value of parameter 0.2 to 1.See User's manual chapter 12.
If parameter group 0 is not visible, make itvisible as follows:
1. If parameter lock is set on, open the lock,parameter 1. 16, by setting the value ofthe parameter to 0.
2. If parameter conceal is set on, open theconceal parameter 1. 15, by setting thevalue of the parameter to 0.Group 0 becomes visible.
D Language selection
The language of the text shown on theoperator's panel can be chosen with parameter0. 3. See HV9000 User's Manual, chapter 11.
General
![Page 86: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-1
1Standard Application
STANDARD CONTROL APPLICATION
(par. 0.1 = 2)
CONTENTS
1 Standard Application.........................1-1
1.1 General .........................................1-21.2 Control I/O ....................................1-21.3 Control signal logic .......................1-31.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................1-4
1.4.1 Parameter table ...................1-41.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...1-5
1.5 Special parameters, Groups 2-8 ..1-81.5.1 Parameter tables ................ 1-81.5.2 Description of Groups. ..... 1-12
![Page 87: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
Page 1-2 HV9000
1 1 STANDARD APPLICATION
1.1 GeneralThe Standard application has the same I/Osignals and same Control logic as the Basicapplication. Digital input DIA3 and all outputsare programmable.
The Standard Application can be selected by
setting the value of parameter 0. 1 to 2.Basic connections of inputs and outputs areshown in the figure 1.2-1. The control signallogic is shown in the figure 1.3-1.Programming of I/O terminals is explainedin chapter 1.5.
Standard Application
Referencepotentiometer
220VACMax.
RUN
READY
FAULT
Figure 1.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Standard Application.
1.2 Control I/O
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref
Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, voltage Frequency reference if activated ifrange 0—10 V DC terminals 14 and 15 open and para-
meter 1.17 = 0 (default value)
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, current Frequency reference activated if5 Iin- range 0—20 mA terminals 14 and 15 closed, or open
and parameter 1.17 = 1
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(Programmable)
9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)
10 DIA3 External fault input Contact open = no fault(Programmable) Contact closed = fault
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 DIB4 DIB5 Frequency ref.
15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 open open Ref. Vin (par.1.17=0)closed open Multi-step ref. 1open closed Multi-step ref. 2closed closed Ref. Iin (term. #4,5)
16 DIB6 Fault reset Contact open = no actionContact closed = fault reset
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Output frequency Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable ( par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 RUN
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable ( par. 3. 8 )
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
![Page 88: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-3
11.3 Control signal logic
Figure 1.3-1 Control signal logic of the Standard Application.
Standard Application
DIB4
DIB5
DIA1
DIB6
DIA2
DIA3
>1
Vin+
Iin±
Cutler-Hammer
UP
DOWN
0STOP
ENTER
RESET ISTART
PROGRAMMABLEPUSH-BUTTON 2
Internalfrequencyreference
InternalStart/Stop
Internalfault reset
Internalreverse
Start forward(programmable)
Fault reset input
Start reverse(programmable)
External fault input(programmable)
= control line= signal line
Start/Stop
Reverse
ProgrammableStart/Stopand reverselogic
BASIC PARAMETERS
Group 1
1. 5 Multi-step speed reference 1
1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 2
1. 17 Basic reference selection
CH012K01
Panel referenceStart/Stop buttonsRST buttonProgr. button1
Multi-step speed sel. 1
Multi-step speed sel. 2
![Page 89: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Page 1-4 HV9000
1
Standard Application
Table 1.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
1.4 PARAMETERS, GROUP 1
1.4.1 Parameter table
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 1-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 1-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3,0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 1-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 1-5
1. 5 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 1-5reference 1
1. 6 Multi-step speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 60.0 Hz 1-5reference 2
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 1-5
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 1-51 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0 —1 1 0 0 = None 1-61 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 1-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 1-7of the motor the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 1-7
380—440 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 575 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 1-70 = all parameter groups visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 1-70 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled
1. 17 Basic frequency 0—2 1 0 0 = analog input Vn 1-7reference selection 1 = analog input In
2 = reference from the panel
* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityfor motor and drive system.Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 1-5.
** Default value for a four pole motorand a nominal size drive.
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only
when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
***Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case
![Page 90: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-5
11.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum/maximum frequency
Defines the frequency limits of the drive.
The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting thevalue of the parameter 1. 2 to 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator notlit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time theresolution of the display panel is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.
Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz in done by setting parameter 1. 2to 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1. 2).
1. 5, 1. 6 Multi-step speed reference 1, Multi-step speed reference 2:
Figure 1.4-1 Example of Multi-step speed references.
Parameter values are automatically limited between minimum and maximumfrequency ( par 1. 1, 1. 2).
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the 0 constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point (par. 6. 3)
where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to the motor. Seefigure 1.4-2.
A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.
Standard Application
t
f[Hz]
Par. 1. 5
Par. 1. 6
DIB4
DIB5
Ref. Vin
Run
Stop
Run
Stop Ch009K06
(Par. 1.17 = 0)
Ref. Iin
![Page 91: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
Page 1-6 HV9000
1This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve formwith the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied tothe motor. See figure 1.4-2.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of the
Standard Application
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.
Figure 1.4-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
Programm.The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.
V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 1.5.2.A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings
2 do not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 1.4-3.
Figure 1.4-3 Programmable V/Hz curve.
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce enough torque to start and run at low frequencies.
The boost voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.
U [V]
Vn Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
![Page 92: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-7
1Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where starting torquedue to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely that the motor willoverheat. If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the operating temperature rise is too high.
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to 100%x Vnmotor.
Note! If the nominal motor voltage is lower than the supply voltage, checkthat the insulation level of the motor is adequate.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are predefined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 1.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = all groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Permits access for changing the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
1. 17 Basic frequency reference selection
0 = Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 = Analog current reference from terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 = Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),
see chapter 7.5.
Standard Application
!
![Page 93: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Page 1-8 HV9000
1
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 1-151 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0xInHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2xTnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2xPnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100%xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00 s 0 = no filtering 1-15
3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 1-151 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 1-151 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 1-15
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
Standard Application
1.5 SPECIAL PARAMETERS, GROUPS 2—8
1.5.1 Parameter tables
Group 2, Input signal parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
DIA1 DIA2
2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 1-12selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse
2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—5 1 1 0 = Not used 1-13(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)
2. 3 Reference offset 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 1-13for current input 1 = 4—20 mA
2. 4 Reference scaling, 0—par. 2.5 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 1-13minimum value corresponds to the minimum
reference signal
2. 5 Reference scaling, 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 1-13maximum value corresponds to the maximum
reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Maximum frequency value
2. 6 Reference invert 0—1 1 0 0 = No inversion 1-141 = Reference inverted
2. 7 Reference filter time 0.00 —10.00s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 1-14
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 94: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-9
1 Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 6 Digital output function 0—14 1 1 0 = Not used 1-161 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Multi-step speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit superv.14 = Control from I/O-terminal
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—14 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 1-16
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—14 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 1-16
3. 9 Output freq. limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 1-16supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-16supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 11 I/O-expander option board 0—7 1 3 As parameter 3. 1 1-15analog output function
3. 12 I/O-expander option board 10—1000% 1% 100% As parameter 3. 5 1-15analog output scale
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 1-17>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./Dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 1-17>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 1-17
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 1-17
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 1-171 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 1-171 = Flying start
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 1-181 = Ramp
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 1-18InHV9 (A)
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00—250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off 1-18
Standard Application
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 95: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
Page 1-10 HV9000
1 Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-19range low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 1-19range high limit (1. 1) (1. 2) (max limit = par. 1. 2)
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 1-201 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 10/3.6 kHz Dependant on Hp rating 1-20
6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 1-201. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15 —200% 1% 100% 1-20weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 1-20point frequency
6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 1-20point voltage x Vnmot parameter 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.0% 0.01% 0.00% 1-20zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is off 1-201 = Controller is on
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is off 1-201 = Controller is on
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 1-21reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 2 0 = No action 1-21external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 1-21the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 1-212 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 1-221 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 1-221 = Warning2 = Fault
Standard Application
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 96: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-11
1Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = no action 1-23number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart: multi- 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 1-23attempt max. trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 1-24start function 1 = Flying start
Table 1.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.
Standard Application
![Page 97: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
Page 1-12 HV9000
1 1.5.2 Description of Group 2—8 parameters
2. 1 Start/Stop logic selection
0 DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 1.5-1.
Figure 1.5-2 Start, Stop, reverse.
DIA1
DIA2
1 2 3
t
UD009K09
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
FWD
REV
Figure 1.5-1 Start forward/Start reverse.
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority
2 When DIA1 contact opens, the direction of rotation starts to change
3 If Start forward (DIA1) and Start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the Start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.
1 DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 1.5-2.
DIA1
DIA2
t
UD012K10
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7= coasting
FWD
REV
Standard Application
![Page 98: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-13
12: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = start enabled open contact = start disabled
3: 3-wire connection (pulse control):
DIA1: closed contact = start pulseDIA2: closed contact = stop pulse(DIA3 can be programmed for reverse command)See figure 1.5-3.
t
min 50 ms
UD009K11
FWD
REV
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
If Start and Stop pulses are simultaneous the Stop pulseoverrides the Start pulse
DIA1Start
DIA2Stop
Figure 1.5-3 Start pulse/Stop pulse.
2. 2 DIA3 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe contact is closed.
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe contact is open.
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward Can be used for reversing ifcontact closed = Reverse parameter 2. 1 has value 3
2.3 Reference offset for current input
0: No offset1: Offset 4 mA, provides supervision of zero level signal. The response to reference
fault can be programmed with the parameter 7. 1.
Standard Application
![Page 99: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
Page 1-14 HV9000
1
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 7
t [s]
UD009K15
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
2.6 Reference invert
Inverts reference signal:
max. ref. signal = min.set freq.min. ref. signal = max. set freq.See figure 1.5-6.
Figure 1.5-4 Reference scaling. Figure 1.5-5 Reference scaling,parameter 2. 5 = 0.
Standard Application
100
par. 2. 4
par. 2. 5
Ch012K12
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
100 Ch012K13
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
0
par. 2. 4
par. 2. 5
Ch012K14
Outputfrequency
Analoginput
max.
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
Figure 1.5-6 Reference invert.
Figure 1.5-7 Reference filtering.
2.4, 2.5 Reference scaling, minimumvalue/maximum value
Setting value limits: 0 < par. 2. 4< par. 2. 5 < par. 1. 2.If parameter 2. 5 = 0 scaling is setoff. See figures 1.5-4 and 1.5-5.
2.7 Reference filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming reference signal. A longfiltering time makes regulationresponse slower. See figure 1.5-7.
![Page 100: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-15
13. 1 Analog output function
See table "Group 3, output andsupervision parameters" on thepage 1-8.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 1.5-8.
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Standard Application
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 1.5-8 Analog output filtering.
Figure 1.5-9 Analog output invert.
Figure 1.5-10 Analog output scale.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset valueSee figure 1.5-9
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. See figure1.5-10.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 1.5-10.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)frequencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V
![Page 101: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
Page 1-16 HV9000
1 3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content
0 = Not used Out of operation
Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:
1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1
- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Multi-step speed selected A multi-step speed has been selected11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision The output frequency goes outside of the set super-
vision low limit/ high limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Control from I/O terminals Ext. control mode selected with progr. push-button #2
Table 1.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
3. 9 Output frequency limit supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10) this function generatesa warning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9. See figure 1.5-11.
Standard Application
Figure 1.5-11 Output frequency supervision.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD009K19
Example:
Par. 3.9 = 2
![Page 102: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-17
14. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequencyimmediately follows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4.4 for Acc/Dec. time 2).Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 1.5-12.
4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to changefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2.
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of themotor and the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor isselected correctly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal tothat of acceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may extend theacceleration times).
Standard Application
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
f
Figure 1.5-12 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
![Page 103: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
Page 1-18 HV9000
1 Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:
0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after theStop command is issued.
Ramp:
1 After the Stop command is issued, the speed of the motor is deceleratedbased on the deceleration ramp time parameter.If the regenerated energy is high, it may be necessary to use an externalbraking resistor for faster deceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
Determines whether DC braking is ON or OFF. It also determines the braking durationtime of the DC-brake when the motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brakedepends on the stop function, parameter 4. 7. See figure 1.5-13.
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function(param. 4. 7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the valueof parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10% ofthe nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9. See figure1.5-13.
Standard Application
![Page 104: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-19
1
Figure 1.5-13 DC-braking time when stop = coasting.
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelerationramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at0.5 Hz.
fout fout
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9
UD009K21RUNSTOP
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON
The braking time is defined bypar. 4. 9. If the load has a highinertia, use an external brakingresistor for faster deceleration.
See figure 1.5-14.
Standard Application
0,1x fn
RUN
STOP
t = param. 4. 9
t0.5 Hz
fout
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
fout
5. 1 5. 2
[Hz]
[Hz]
UD009K24
frequency reference
5. 1 Prohibit frequency area5. 2 Low limit/High limit
In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonance problems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for one "skipfrequency" region between 0 Hzand 120 Hz/500 Hz. Accuracy ofthe setting is 0.1 Hz.
See figure 1.5-15.
[Hz]
[Hz][Hz]
Speed
Figure 1.5-14 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp.
Figure 1.5-15 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting.
![Page 105: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
Page 1-20 HV9000
1 6. 1 Motor control mode
0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequency ref-erences and the drive controls the output frequency (out-put freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed refer-ences and the drive controls the motor speed (controlaccuracy ± 0.5%).
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the current capacity of the HV9000.
Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp)check the drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter5.2 of the User's Manual.
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (parameter 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltageremains constant at the set maximum value. Below that frequency the output voltagedepends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7.See figure 1.5-16.
When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor, are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to the samevalues. If you need different values for the field weakening point and the maximumoutput voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.
6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle voltage point of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 1.5-16.
6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when the controllers are not used.
Standard Application
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
![Page 106: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-21
1
Figure 1.5-16 Programmable V/Hz curve.
7. 1 Response to reference faults
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault detection according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA.The information can also be programmed via digital output DO1 and via relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault detection according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3.
The information can also be programmed into digital output DO1 and into relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of motor phase currents is zero. Thestandard overcurrent protection is always present and protects the drive from groundfaults with high current levels.
Standard Application
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
![Page 107: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
Page 1-22 HV9000
17.5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip
The motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. In theStandard application the thermal protection has fixed settings. In otherapplications it is possible to set the thermal protection parameters. A trip or awarning will give an indication on the display. If trip is selected, the drive will stopthe motor and generate a fault.
Deactivating the protection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the internal thermalmodel to 0% heating.
1.5-17. If the motor current is over the curve the motor temperature is increasing.
CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dustor dirt.
7. 6 Stall protection
Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
The Motor Stall protection provides a warning or a fault based on a short time overloadof the motor e.g. stalled shaft. The stall protection is faster than the motor thermalprotection. The stall state is defined with Stall Current and Stall Frequency. In theStandard application they both have fixed values. See figure 1.5-18. If the current ishigher than the set limit and output frequency is lower than the set limit the stallstate is true. If the stall lasts longer than 15 s a stall warning is given on the displaypanel. In the other applications it is possible to set the parameters of the Stallprotection function. Tripping and warning will give a display indication. If tripping isset on, the drive will stop and generate a fault.
Standard Application
100%×INmotor
45%×INmotor
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_9035 Hz
Overload area
Currentlimit
The HV9000 is capable of providinghigher than nominal current to themotor. If the load requires this highcurrent there is a risk that motor willbe thermally overloaded. This istrue especially at low frequencies.With low frequencies the coolingeffect of the motor fan is reducedand the capacity of the motor isreduced. Motor thermal protectionis based on a calculated model andit uses the output current of thedrive to determine the load on themotor.
The thermal current IT specifiesthe load current above which themotor is overloaded. See figure
[Hz]
!
Figure 1.5-17 Motor thermal current IT curve.
![Page 108: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
HV9000 Page 1-23
1
Standard Application
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function will restart the drive after the following faults:
- overcurrent- overvoltage- undervoltage- over/under temperature of the drive- reference fault
Figure 1.5-19 Automatic restart.
Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.
The count time starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the count is cleared afterthe trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.
Figure 1.5-18 Stall state.
f
I
130%×INmotor
25 Hz UMCH7_10
Stall area
4
3
2
1
t
UD012K25
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
ttrial ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2
[Hz]
Deactivating the stall protection bysetting the parameter to 0 willreset the stall time counter to zero.
![Page 109: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
Page 1-24 HV9000
1
Standard Application
Notes:
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
![Page 110: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-1Local/Remote Control Application
2
CONTENTS
2 Local/Remote Control Application ..2-1
2.1 General ........................................2-22.2 Control I/O....................................2-22.3 Control signal logic .......................2-32.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................2-4
2.4.1 Parameter table ..................2-42.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...2-5
2.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 2-82.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 2-82.5.2 Description of Group 2 par. . 2-15
LOCAL/REMOTE CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 3)
![Page 111: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
Page 2-2 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, Source B frequency referencevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, Source A frequency reference
5 Iin- current (programmable) range 0—20 mA
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Source A: Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)
9 DIA2 Source A: Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)
10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = fault reset
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Source B: Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)
15 DIB5 Source B: Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(programmable)
16 DIB6 Source A/B selection Contact open = source A is activeContact closed = source B is active
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Output frequency Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable (par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable (par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 RUN
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable (par. 3. 8)
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
Local referencepotentiometer
READY
RUN
220VACMax.
FAULT
Remote reference0(4)—20 mA
Remote control24 V
Remote control ground
of parameter 0. 1 to 3.
Basic connections of inputs and outputs areshown in the figure 2.2-1. The control signallogic is shown in the figure 2.3-1. Programmingof I/O terminals is explained in chapter 2.5,Special parameters.
2.2 Control I/O
2.1 General
By utilizing the Local/Remote ControlApplication, the use of two different controland frequency reference sources isprogrammable. The active control source isselected with digital input DIB6.
The Local/Remote Control Application can beactivated from the Group 0 by setting the value
Figure 2.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Local/Remote Control Application.
![Page 112: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-3Local/Remote Control Application
2
Figure 2.3-1 Control signal logic of the Local/Remote Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.
2.3 Control signal logic
! !"
"!! "
#"! !"
$%&#
##%'##()'#*'+%)
##%'##()'#*'+%)
"$",! #
))(-)'.()'
))%&
))(#*
))/*
%'##*'+%)0#*#+)&1&%234
5#'%)%#+)5#*+2)#+)
)%2()'
%23%&#)6"/*#*+2)%2+'7#%'#
%23%&#)6"/*#*+2)%2+'7#%'#
%%&%)+%
&
%8)
#0
#"/9
#0
#"/9
:+);
+)<
![Page 113: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
Page 2-4 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
2.4 Basic parameters, Group 12.4.1 Parameter table
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 2-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 2-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 2-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 2-5
1. 5 Source A: reference 0—4 1 1 0 = Anal. voltage input (term. 2) 2-5signal 1 = Anal. current input (term. 4)
2 = Set reference from the panel3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot.reset if HV9000 is stopped
1. 6 Source B: reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Anal. voltage input (term. 2) 2-5signal 1 = Anal. current input (term. 4)
2 = Set reference from the panel3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot.reset if HV9000 unit is stopped
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 2-5
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 2-51 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 2-71 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 2-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 2-7of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 2-7of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the nameplate of 2-7of the motor the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 2-7
380—440 400 V Voltage code 4
380—500 500 V Voltage code 5
525—690 690 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 2-70 = All parameter groups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 2-70 = Changes enabled1 = Changes disabled
Table 2.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only
when the drive is stopped.
* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motorand drive system. Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range, seepage 2-5.
** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominalsize HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 114: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-5Local/Remote Control Application
2
2.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum / maximum frequency
Defines the frequency limits of the drive.
The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting thevalue of parameter 1. 2 to 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit)parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution ofthe panel reference is changed from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.
Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1. 2 to119 Hz while the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2). Acceleration/deceleration times can be reduced with a freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
1. 5 Source A reference signal
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),see
chapter 7.5 in the User's Manual.3 The reference value is controlled by digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.
- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesThe speed range for the reference change can be set with the parameter2.3.
4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 2. 14 or par. 1. 1 if par 2. 15 = 0) each time the drive is stopped. Whenthe value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, parameter 2. 1 is automaticallyset to 4 and parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.
1. 6 Source B reference signal
See the values of the parameter 1. 5.
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term. Current limit can be set lower with a free analog input signal. Seeparameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency inthe constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point
0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 2.4-1.
A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.
This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.
![Page 115: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
Page 2-6 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve formwith the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal maximum voltage is supplied tothe motor. See figure 2.4-1.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand ofthe load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.
Figure 2.4-2 Programmable V/Hz curve.
Figure 2.4-1 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
Programm.The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 2.5.2 2 Programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings
do not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 2.4-2.
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
U [V]
Vn Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
![Page 116: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-7Local/Remote Control Application
2
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which allows thetorque motor to produce torque enough to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.
Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where startingtorque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions, specialattention must be paid to cooling of the motor. Use external cooling forthe motor if the temperature rise is too high.
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to 100%x Vnmotor.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 2.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = all groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access for changing the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
If you have to adjust more of the functions of the Local/Remote Control Application, seechapter 2.5 to set up parameters of Groups 2—8.
!
![Page 117: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
Page 2-8 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
2.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8
2.5.1 Parameter tables, Group 2, Input signal parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
DIA1 DIA2
2. 1 Source A Start/Stop 0—4 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 2-15logic selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse
2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse4 = Start forward Motor pot. UP
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—10 1 7 0 = Not used 2-16(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc/dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor potentiometer DOWN
2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 2-171 = Custom setting range
2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 2-17
2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 2-17
2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0 — 1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 2-181 = Inverted
2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 2-18
2. 8 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 2-191 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range
2. 9 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 2-19
2. 10 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 2-19
2. 11 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 2-191 = Inverted
2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10s 0 = No filtering 2-19
2. 13 Source B Start/Stop 0—3 1 0 DIB4 DIB5logic selection 0 = Start forward Start reverse 2-20
1 = Start/Stop Reverse2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse
2. 14 Source A reference 0—par. 2. 15 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling minimum value to the min. reference signal
2. 15 Source A reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) to the max. reference signal
0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value
2. 16 Source B reference 0—par. 2. 17 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling minimum value to the min. reference signal
2. 17 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Sets the frequency corresponding 2-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) to the max. reference signal
0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 118: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-9Local/Remote Control Application
2
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 18 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not uset 2-20signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)
2 = Iin (analog current input)
2. 19 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 2-20function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1. 7)
2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervis. limit
2. 20 Motor potentiometer 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 2-22ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 2-221 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% x VnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 100 s 2-22
3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 2-221 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 2-221 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 2-22
3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 2-231 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7= Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit
superv. 114 = Output frequency limit
superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit super-
vision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control
inverted
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 119: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
Page 2-10 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—21 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 2-23
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—21 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 2-23
3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 11 Output freq. limit 2 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 12 Output freq. limit 2 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 2-24supervision value x TnHV9
3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 2-24supervision 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 16 Active reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 17 External brake OFF delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 2-25
3. 18 External brake ON delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 2-25
3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No supervision 2-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit
3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 2-25temperature limit
3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 2-22analog output function
3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 2-22analog output filter time
3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 2-22analog output inversion
3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 2-22analog output minimum
3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 2-22analog output scale
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 120: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-11Local/Remote Control Application
2
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 2-26>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./Dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 2-26>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 2-26
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 2-26
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 2-261 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 2-261 = Flying start
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 2-271 = Ramp
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 0.1 0.5 x 2-27InHV9 (A) InHV9
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00—250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 2-27
4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC- 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 2-28brake during ramp Stop
4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 2-28
4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 2-29
Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-29range 1 low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 1 is off 2-29range 1 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 3 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-29range 2 low limit par. 5. 4
5. 4 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 2 is off 2-29range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 5 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-29range 3 low limit par. 5. 6
5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 3 is off 2-29range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
![Page 121: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
Page 2-12 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 2-291 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Depends on Hp rating 2-29
6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 2-291. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 2-29weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz-curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 2-30point frequency
6. 6 V/Hz-curve mid 0.00—100.00 % 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 2-30point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00 % 0.01% 0.00% 2-30zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 2-301 = Controller is operating
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 2-301 = Controller is operating
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 122: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-13Local/Remote Control Application
2
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 2-30reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according to par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 2-31external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according to par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 2-31the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 2-312 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 2-321 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0% 1.0% 100.0% 2-32break point current x InMOTOR
7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 45.0% 2-32zero frequency current x InMOTOR
7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 2-33time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current
7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 2-33break point frequency
7. 10 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 2-341 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 2-34x InMOTOR
7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 2-34
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 2-34
7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 2-351 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0% 1.0% 50.0% 2-35weakening area load x TnMOTOR
7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 2-35zero frequency load x TnMOTOR
7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0s 2-36
![Page 123: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
Page 2-14 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = Not in use 2-36number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart: multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 2-36attempt maximum trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 2-37start function 1 = Flying start
8. 4 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37undervoltage 1 = Yes
8. 5 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37overvoltage 1 = Yes
8. 6 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37overcurrent 1 = Yes
8. 7 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37reference fault 1 = Yes
8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 2-37over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault
Table 2.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.
![Page 124: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-15Local/Remote Control Application
2
2.5.2 Description of Groups 2—8 parameters
2. 1 Start/Stop logic selection
0: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 2.5-1.
Figure 2.5-1 Start forward/Start reverse.
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority
2 When DIA1 contact opens, the direction of rotation starts to change
3 If Start forward (DIA1) and Start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the Start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.
1: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 2.5-2.
Figure 2.5-2 Start, Stop, reverse.
DIA1
DIA2
1 2 3
t
UD009K09
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
FWD
REV
DIA1
DIA2
t
UD012K10
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7= coasting
FWD
REV
![Page 125: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
Page 2-16 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Figure 2.5-3 Start pulse /Stop pulse.
2. 2 DIA3 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the contact is closed
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is open
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward Can be used for reversing ifcontact closed = Reverse parameter 2. 1 has value 3
6: Jog freq. contact closed = Jog frequency selected for freq. refer.
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec. operation prohibitedcontact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration until
the contact is opened
9: DC-braking commandcontact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operates
until the contact is opened, see figure 2.5-4. Dc-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
10: Motor pot. meter down contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact is
opened
t
min 50 ms
UD009K11
FWD
REV
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
If Start and Stop pulses are simultaneous the Stop pulseoverrides the Start pulse
DIA1Start
DIA2Stop
2: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = start enabled open contact = start disabled
3: 3-wire connection (pulse control):
DIA1: closed contact = start pulseDIA2: closed contact = stop pulse(DIA3 can be programmed for reverse command)See figure 2.5-3.
4: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = reference increases (motor potentiometer
reference, par. 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 ifpar. 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4).
![Page 126: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-17Local/Remote Control Application
2
Figure 2.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop-mode = Ramp,b) Stop-mode = Coasting.
2. 3 Vin signal range
0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom maximum (par. 2. 5)
2.4-2.5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum
With these parameters you can set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.
Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 4,press the Enter button
Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximun level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons).
t
UD009K32
Param. 4. 10
DIA3
t
UD009K32
DIA3
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting
![Page 127: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
Page 2-18 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
2. 6 Vin signal inversion
Vin is source B frequencyreference, par. 1. 6 = 1 (default)
Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal.
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 7
t [s]
UD009K15
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
10 V0 Param. 2.4Ch012K46
Outputfrequency
Vin(term. 2)
Vin = custom
Vin = 0—10 V
Parameter2.16
Parameter2.17
Parameter 2.3 =0
Parameter 2.3=1
Param. 2.5
Figure 2.5-5 Vin no signal inversion.
Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversion ofanalog Vin signalmax. Vin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Vin signal = maximum setspeed
Figure 2.5-6 Vin signal inversion.
2. 7 Vin signal filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal.A long filtering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 2.5-7.
Figure 2.5-7 Vin signal filtering
Par. 2.17
Par. 2.16
Par. 2.4 Par. 2.5 10V
Par. 2.3=0Vin = 0-10 V
UD12K47
Output frequency
VinTerm. 2
Par. 2.3 = 1Vin = custom
![Page 128: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-19Local/Remote Control Application
2
2. 8 Analog input Iin signal range
0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span
See figure 2.5-8.
2. 9 Analog input Iin custom2. 10 setting minimum/maximum
With these parameters you canscale the input current tocorrespond to a minimum andmaximum frequency range. Seefigure 2.5-8.
Minimum setting:Set the Iin signal to its minimumlevel, select parameter 2. 9,press the Enter buttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximunlevel, select parameter 2. 10,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values canonly be set with this procedure(not with arrow up/arrow downbuttons).
2. 11 Analog input Iin inversion
Iin is source A frequency reference,par. 1. 5 = 0 (default)
Parameter 2. 11 = 0, no inversionof Iin inputParameter 2. 11 = 1, inversion ofIin input. See figure 2.5-9.
max. Iin signal = minimum setspeed
min. Iin signal = maximum setspeed
2. 12 Analog input Iin filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 2.5-10.
20 mA0
par. 2. 14
par. 2. 15
par. 2. 9 par. 2. 10
par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
4 mA
par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
UD009K28
Outputfrequency
Uin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
20 mA0
par. 2. 14
par. 2. 15
par. 2. 9 par. 2. 10
par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
4 mA
par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
UD009K29
Outputfrequency
Uin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 12
t [s]
UD009K30
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 2.5-8 Analog input Iinscaling.
Figure 2.5-9 Iin signal inversion.
Figure 2.5-10 Analog input Iin filter time.
Iin[term.3,4]
Iin[term.3,4]
![Page 129: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Page 2-20 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
2. 13 Source B Start/Stop logic selectionSee parameter 2. 1, settings 0—3.
2. 14, Source A reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value2. 15 Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 14 < par. 2. 15 < par. 1. 2.
If par. 2. 15 = 0 scaling is set off. See figures 2.5-11 and 2.5-12.
(In the figures below voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V selected for source Areference)
Figure 2.5-11 Reference scaling. Figure 2.5-12 Reference scaling,par. 2. 15 = 0.
2. 16, Source B reference scaling,2. 17 minimum value/maximum value
See parameters 2.14 and 2. 15.
2. 18 Free analog input signal
Selection of input signal of a free analog input (an input not used for reference signal):
0 = Not in use1 = Voltage signal Vin2 = Current signal Iin
2. 19 Free analog input signalfunction
Use this parameter to select afunction for a free analog inputsignal:
0 = Function is not used1 = Reducing motor
current limit (par. 1. 7)
This signal will adjust themaximum motor current between0 and ,par. 1. 7 set max. limit. Seefigure 2.5-13.
100
par. 2. 4
par. 2. 5
Ch012K12
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
100 Ch012K13
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
100%Par. 1. 7
UD012K61
Torque limit
Analoginput
Signal range0 V0 mA4 mACustom
10 V20 mA20 mACustom
Figure 2.5-13 Scaling of max. motor current.
![Page 130: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-21Local/Remote Control Application
2
0
100%Par. 3. 14
UD012K60
Torque limit
Free analog input
Signal range
2 = Reducing DC brakecurrent.
The DC braking current can bereduced with the free analog inputsignal between current 0.15 x InHV9and the current set by parameter4. 8. See figure 2.5-14.
0
100%Par. 4. 8
0,15 x InFU
UD012K58
DC-brakingcurrent
Free analoginput
Signal range
10
1
Ch012K59
2
Factor R
Free analoginput
Signal range
0.15 x InHV9
Figure 2.5-14 Reducing DC brake current.
Figure 2.5-15 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.
Figure 2.5-16 Reducing torque supervision limit
3 = Reducing accelerationand decelerationtimes.
The acceleration and decelerationtimes can be reduced with the freeanalog input signal according tothe following formulas:
Reduced time = set acc./deceler.time (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4. 3,4. 4) divided by the factor R fromfigure 2.5-15.
4 = Reducing torquesupervision limit.
Torque supervision limit can bereduced with a free analog inputsignal between 0 and the setsupervision limit (par. 3. 14). Seefigure 2.5-16.
![Page 131: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Page 2-22 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
2. 20 Motor potentiometer ramptime
Defines how fast the electronicmotor potentiometer valuechanges.
3. 1 Analog output Content
See table for parameter 3.1 onpage 2-9.
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
Figure 2.5-17 Analog output filtering.
Figure 2.5-18 Analog output invert.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 2.5-17.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset value
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA.See figure 2.5-19.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 2.5-19.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMot
DC-link volt. 1000 V
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 2.5-19 Analog output scale.
![Page 132: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-23Local/Remote Control Application
2
3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content
0 = Not used Out of operation
Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:
1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1
- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14 = Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15 = Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16 = Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision
limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable
delay (par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. pushbutton #219= Drive Temperature on drive is outside the set
temperature limit supervision supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the
requested one21= External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18),
output active when brake control is OFF
Table 2.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
![Page 133: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
Page 2-24 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11). See figure2.5-20.
3. 13 Torque limit , supervisionfunction
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3.14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofthe parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD012K19
Par 3. 9 = 2
Example:
3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value
The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13. Torquesupervision value can be reduced below the setpoint with a free analog input signal,see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
3. 15 Reference limit , supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised referenceis the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or panel reference if panel is the active control source.
3. 16 Reference limit , supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.
Figure 2.5-20 Output frequency supervision.
![Page 134: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-25Local/Remote Control Application
2
3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay
The function of the external brake can be delayed from the start and stop controlsignals with these parameters. See figure 2.5-21.
t
a)
t
b)
UD012K45
DIA1: RUN FWD
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: RUN REV
STOP
DIA1: START
PULSE
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: STOP
PULSE
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
Figure 2.5-21 Ext. brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b) Start/Stop logic selection par 2. 1 = 3.
The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or viaone of the relay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If temperature of the unit goes under/over the set limit (par. 3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 20 Drive temperature supervision limit value
The set temperature value to be supervised with the parameter 3. 19.
![Page 135: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
Page 2-26 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
4. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 for Acc/Dectime 2).
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possible to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can be reducedwith a free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of the motorand the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor is selectedcorrectly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that ofacceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolongedacceleration times).
Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure2.5-22.
f
Figure 2.5-22 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
![Page 136: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-27Local/Remote Control Application
2
Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stop
command.
Ramp:1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated based on
the deceleration ramp time parameter.
If the regenerated energy is high, it may be necessary to use an externalbraking resistor for faster deceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.The DC braking current can be reduced from the setpoint with a external freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
Determines whether DC braking is ON or OFF. It also determines the braking durationtime of the DC-brake when the motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brakedepends on the stop function, parameter 4. 7. See figure 2.5-23.
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends of the stop function,(parameter 4. 7), The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the valueof parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10%of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9. Seefigure 2.5-13.
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on thedeceleration ramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at a speed defined by parameter 4. 10.
![Page 137: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Page 2-28 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0,1 x par. 4. 9
UD012K21
0,1 x fn
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON
fout fout
The braking time is definedby par. 4. 9. If the load has ahigh inertia, use an externalbraking resistor for fasterdeceleration.See figure 2.5-24.
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop
See figure 2.5-24.
4. 11 DC-brake time at start
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 The DC-brake is activatedby the start commandgiven. This parameterdefines the time before thebrake is released. After thebrake is released the outputfrequency increasesaccording to the set startfunction parameter 4. 6and the accelerationparameters (1. 3, 4. 1 or 4.2, 4. 3). See figure 2.5-25.
t = Par. 4. 9
t
Par. 4. 10
UD012K23
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
RUNSTOP
fout
t
UD012K22
Par 4. 11
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
Figure 2.5-23 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 0.
[Hz] [Hz]
[Hz]
fout
[Hz]
Figure 2.5-24 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7= 1.
Figure 2.5-25 DC-braking timeat start.
![Page 138: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-29Local/Remote Control Application
2
4. 12 Jog speed reference
This parameter value defines the jog speed if the DIA3 digital input is programmedfor Jog and is selected. See parameter 2. 2.
5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency areaLow limit/High limit
In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions between 0 Hzand 500 Hz. The accuracy of thesetting is 0.1 Hz. See figure 2.5-26 frequency
reference
5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6
UD012K33
Reference [Hz]
Outputfrequency [Hz]
6. 1 Motor control mode
0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency(output freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed (controlaccuracy ± 0.5%).
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the current capacity of the HV9000.
Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp) checkthe drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter 5.2 of theUser's Manual.
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (parameter 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltageremains constant at the set maximum value. Below that frequency the output voltagedepends on the setting of the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7.See figure 1.5-16.
When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor, are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to the same values.If you need different values for the field weakening point and the maximum outputvoltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.
Figure 2.5-26 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting.
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
![Page 139: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
Page 2-30 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 2.5-27.
6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure2.5-27.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. Seefigure 2.5-27.
6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used.
7. 1 Response to the reference fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]Vn
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Figure 2.5-27 Programmable V/Hz curve.
![Page 140: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-31Local/Remote Control Application
2
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault detection
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalon digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relayoutputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault message
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always present and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.
Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection
General
Motor thermal protection protects the motor from overheating. The HV9000 drive iscapable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith a separately powered external fan, the load derating at low speed is small.
Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the output cur-rent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the motor is poweredfrom the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the ambi-ent temperature of the motor is 40°C.
Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. The thermalcurrent IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded. This cur-rent level is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set with param-eters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9. See figure 2.5-28. The default values of these parametersare set from the motor nameplate data.
With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes by the square of the current. With output current at 75%of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT the thermalstage would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5) if the thermalstate reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermal model is deter-mined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor, the longer it takesto reach the final temperature.
![Page 141: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Page 2-32 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
7. 5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.
7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current
This current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. Refer to the figure 2.5-28.
The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current , parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.
The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directonline use without being overheated.
If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.
7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current
This current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer to thefigure 2.5-28.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. Ifan external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).
Par. 7. 6
Par. 7. 7
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9
Overload area
Currentlimit
[Hz]
!
The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).
CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.
Setting this parameter (orparameter 1. 13) does not affectthe maximum output current of thedrive. Parameter 1. 7 alonedetermines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.
Figure 2.5-28 Motor thermal current, IT
curve.
![Page 142: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-33Local/Remote Control Application
2
The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nominal nameplate current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal currentis the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.
If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.
7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant
This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes the calcu-lated thermal stage to reach 63% of its final value.
The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies between differentmotor manufacturers.
The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters isreset, then this parameter is set to default value.
If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the timeconstant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. Cooling inthe stop stage is based on convection with an increased time constant
7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency
This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of the thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant.Refer to the figure 2.5-28.
The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of thefrequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter1. 11 or 6. 3, will restore this parameter to its default value.
Figure 2.5-29 Calculating motor temperature.
105%
par. 7. 5
Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
I/IT
UMCH7_92
Trip area
Motor temperature
TimeMotor temperature
Time constant T*)
*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8
Trip/warningMotorcurrent
![Page 143: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Page 2-34 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral
Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11, Stall Currentand 7.13., Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is no true detectionof shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
7. 10 Stall protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and generate a fault. Deactivating the stallprotection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the stall time counter to zero.
7. 11 Stall current limit
The current can be set between0.0—200% x InMotor.
In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure 2.5-30. The value is set as apercentage of the motor name-plate nominal current, parameter1. 13. If parameter 1. 13 isadjusted, this parameter isautomatically restored to itsdefault value.
Par. 7. 12
UMCH7_12
Trip area
Time
Stall time counter
StallNo stall
Trip/warningpar. 7. 10
f
I
Par. 7. 11
Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11
Stall area
7. 12 Stall time
The time can be set between2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowedtime for a stall. There is aninternal up/down counter tocount the stall time. See figure2.5-31. If the stall time countervalue goes above this limit, thisprotection will cause a trip (referto the parameter 7. 10).
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency
This frequency can be setbetween 1—fmax (param. 1. 2). Inthe stall state the ouput frequencyhas to be smaller than this limit.See figure 2.5-30. Figure 2.5-31 Counting the stall time.
[Hz]
Figure 2.5-30 Setting the stall characteristics.
![Page 144: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-35Local/Remote Control Application
2
Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17, Underload protectionGeneral
The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure there is a load on the motorwhile the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be a problem inthe process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.
Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 2.5-32.
The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1.13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICTare used to create the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.
7. 14 Underload protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning message2 = Fault message
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.
7. 15 Underload protection, field weakening area load
The torque limit can be setbetween 20.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.Refer to the figure 2.5-32.If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 16 Underload protection, zerofrequency load
The torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 2.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
Par. 7. 15
ChCH7_15
Par. 7. 16
f5 Hz
Underload area
Torque
Field weakeningpoint par. 6. 3
f [Hz]
Figure 2.5-32 Setting of minimum load.
![Page 145: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Page 2-36 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
7. 17 Underload time
This time can be set between 2.0—600.0 s.
This is the maximum allowed timefor an underload state. There is aninternal up/down counter toaccumulate the underload time.See figure 2.5-33.If the underload counter valuegoes above this limit, theunderload protection will cause atrip (refer to the parameter 7. 14).If the drive is stopped theunderload counter is reset to zero.
Par. 7. 17
UMCH7_17
Trip area
Time
Underload time counter
Underl.No underl.
Trip/warningpar. 7. 14
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start type for Automatic restart is selected with parameter8. 3. See figure 2.5-34.
Figure 2.5-33 Counting the underload time.
4
3
2
1
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
ttrial
ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = par. 8. 2
t
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
Figure 2.5-34 Automatic restart.
Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.
The count time starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the count is cleared after thetrial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.
![Page 146: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
HV9000 Page 2-37Local/Remote Control Application
2
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:
0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage
0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to normal. (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to normal (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults
8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)
8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault
0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.
![Page 147: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
Page 2-38 HV9000Local/Remote Control Application
2
Notes:
![Page 148: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-1Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
CONTENTS
3 Multi-step Speed Control Appl. ........3-1
3.1 General ........................................3-23.2 Control I/O....................................3-23.3 Control signal logic .......................3-33.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................3-4
3.4.1 Parameter table ..................3-43.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...3-5
3.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 3-83.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 3-83.5.2 Description of Groups. ........ 3-14
MULTI-STEP SPEED CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 4)
![Page 149: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Page 3-2 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Input for reference voltage Basic reference (programmable),range 0—10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Input for reference current Basic reference (programmable),
5 Iin- range 0—20 mA
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND Control voltage ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(Programmable)
9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)
10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(Programmable) Contact closed = fault reset
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Multi-step speed select 1 sel 1 sel 2 sel 3 0 0 0 basic speed
15 DIB5 Multi-step speed select 2 1 0 0 speed 1 0 1 0 speed 2
16 DIB6 Multi-step speed select 3 - - - - - - 1 1 1 speed 7
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Analog output Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Output frequency Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable ( par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 RUN
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable ( par. 3. 8 )
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
Figure 3.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of the Multi-step speed Control Application.
Basic reference(optional)
220VACMax.
RUN
READY
FAULT
3.1 GENERAL
The Multi-step Speed Control Application canbe used in applications where fixed speeds areneeded. in total 9 different speeds can beprogrammed: one basic speed, 7 multi-stepspeeds and one jog speed. The speed stepsare selected with digital signals DIB4, DIB5 andDIB6. If jog speed is used, DIA3 can be
programmed from fault reset to jog speedselect.
The basic speed reference can be either avoltage or a current signal via analog inputterminals (2/3 or 4/5). The other analog inputcan be programmed for other purposes
All outputs are freely programmable.
3.2 CONTROL I/O
Referencepotentiometer
![Page 150: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-3Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3.3 Control signal logic
Figure 3.3-1 Control signal logic of the Multi-step Speed Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.
!!"#!$%"!$
!!&'(
!!")*
!!+*
,)$'!')-!,)*-.!)-!
'./&'()!0 +*)*-.!'.-$
)+*
1 223)
45)!'.)"!$
2-*()*(0)*$-'!)
2-*()*(0)*$-'!)
2-*()*(0)*$-'!)
6'.)*(0)"!$)*$-'!)7('./)-!(8
9)*)7('./)-!(8
:-!;
-!<
)"'=0
7*-$)*(0)"!$8
2 5)))) "!$)*$5))))6'.)*(05)>)2-*()*(0)5)?)2-*()*(0))@)2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)))2-*()*(0)>
![Page 151: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
Page 3-4 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3.4 Basic parameters, Group 1
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 3-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 3-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 3-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 3-5
1. 5 Basic reference 0—1 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term.2) 3-5selection 1 = Analog current input (term.4)
1. 6 Jog speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 5.0 Hz 3-5reference (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 xIn HV9 0.1A 1.5 x In HV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 3-5
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 3-61 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/Hz optimisation 0—1 1 0 0 = None 3-71 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 3-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 3-7of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 3-7of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0,1 A In HV9 In from the nameplate of 3-7of the motor the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 3-7
380—440 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 575 V Voltage code 61. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 3-7
0 = all parameter groups visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 3-70 = changes enabled1 = changes disabled
* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitabilityfor motor and drive systemSelecting 120/500 Hz range see page 3-5.
** Default value for a four pole motor and anominal size HV9000.
*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed
only when the frequency converter isstopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 152: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-5Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 17 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 3-7reference 1 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 18 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 15.0 Hz 3-7reference 2 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 19 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz 3-7reference 3 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 20 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 3-7reference 4 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 21 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 30.0 Hz 3-7reference 5 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 22 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 40.0 Hz 3-7reference 6 (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 23 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 3-7reference 7 (1. 1) (1. 2)
Table 3.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
3.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum/maximum frequency
Defines the frequency limits of the HV9000.
The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz in the when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and1. 2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel reference ischanged from 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter1. 2 to 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time 1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2). Acceleration/deceleration times can be reduced with a freeanalog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
1. 5 Basic reference selection
0: Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1: Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer
1. 6 Jog speed refrence
The value of this parameter defines the jog speed selected with the DIA3 digital inputwhich if it is programmed for Jog speed. See parameter 2. 2.
Parameter value is automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency(par 1. 1, 1. 2)
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term. Current limit can be set lower with a free analog input signal, seeparameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
![Page 153: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
Page 3-6 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Figure 3.4-1 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
Figure 3.4-2 Programmable V/Hz curve.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency inthe constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point
0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal vaue) is supplied tothe motor. See figure 3.4-1.
A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications
This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve formwith the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
1 point (par. 6. 3), where the nominal voltage is supplied tothe motor. See figure 3.4-1.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening point andproduces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squared V/Hz ratiocan be used in applications where the torque demand of the load isproportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugal fans andpumps.
Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 3.5.2. 2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings do
not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 3.4-2.
V [V]
Vn Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor
Field weakening point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of the motor
![Page 154: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-7Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically whichtorque allows the motor to produce enough torque to start andboost run at low frequencies. The voltage increase depends on the motor type
and horsepower. Automatic torque boost can be used in applicationswhere starting torque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.
If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature rise is too high.
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter6. 4, to 100% x Vnmotor.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find then nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, to the same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5, and 6. See table 3.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = all parameter groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
!
![Page 155: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
Page 3-8 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
1. 17 - 1. 23 Multi-step speed reference 1—7
These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected with the DIA4, DIB5and DIB6 digital inputs .
These values are automatically limited between minimum and maximum frequency(par. 1. 1, 1. 2).
Table 3.4-2 Selection of multi-step speed reference 1—7.
Speed Multi-step speed select 1 Multi-step speed select 2 Multi-step speed select 3reference DIB4 DIB5 DIB6
Par. 1. 6 0 0 0
Par. 1. 17 1 0 0
Par. 1. 18 0 1 0
Par. 1. 19 1 1 0
Par. 1. 20 0 0 1
Par. 1. 21 1 0 1
Par. 1. 22 0 1 1
Par. 1. 23 1 1 1
![Page 156: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-9Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8
3.5.1 Parameter tables
Input signal parameters, Group 2
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
DIA1 DIA2
2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 3-15selection 1 = Start/Stop Reverse
2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—9 1 7 0 = Not used 3-16(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./Dec. time selection5 = Reverse (if par. 2. 1 = 3)6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./Dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command
2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 —10 V 3-171 = Custom setting range
2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 3-17
2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 3-17
2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 3-181 = Inverted
2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.0 s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 3-18
2. 8 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 3-191 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range
2. 9 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 3-19
2. 10 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 3-19
2. 11 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 3-191 = Inverted
2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 3-19
2. 13 Reference scaling 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 3-20minimum value par. 2. 14 ponds to the min. reference signal
2. 14 Reference scaling 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 3-20maximum value fmax ponds to the max. reference signal
(1. 2) 0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value
2. 15 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not use 3-20signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)
2 = Iin (analog current input)
2. 16 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 3-20function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1.7)
2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervision limit
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 157: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
Page 3-10 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 3-221 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100%xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s 3-22
3. 3 Analog output 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 3-22inversion 1 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 3-22minimum 1 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 3-22
3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 3-231 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output frequency limit superv. 114 = Output frequency limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O-terminals19 = Drive temperature limit
supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—21 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 3-23
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—21 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 3-23
3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-23supervision value (par. 1. 2)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 158: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-11Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 11 Output freq. limit 2 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 12 Output freq. limit 2 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-23supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0 % 0.1% 100.0% 3-24supervision value xTnHV9
3. 15 Reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 16 Reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 17 Extern. brake Off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 3-24
3. 18 Extern. brake On-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 3-24
3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 3-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision 2 = High limit
3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 40°C 3-25temperature limit value
3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 3-22analog output function
3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 3-22analog output filter time
3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 3-22analog output inversion
3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 3-22analog output minimum
3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 3-22analog output scale
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 3-25>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./Dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 3-25>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0s 0.1 s 10.0 s 3-25
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0s 0.1 s 10.0 s 3-25
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 3-261 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 3-261 = Flying start
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 159: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Page 3-12 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 3-261 = Ramp
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 3-26InHV9 (A)
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 3-26
4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 3-28brake during ramp Stop
4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 3-28
Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-28range 1 low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 1 is off 3-28range 1 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 3 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-28range 2 low limit par. 5. 4
5. 4 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 2 is off 3-28range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 5 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-28range 3 low limit par. 5. 6
5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 3 is of 3-28range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 3-291 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Dependant on Hp rating 3-29
6. 3 Field weakening 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 3-29point 1. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 3-29weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz curve, midpoint 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 3-29frequency
6. 6 V/Hz-curve, midpoint 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 3-29voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 3-29zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is turned off 3-301 = Controller is operating
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is turned off 3-301 = Controller is operating
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 160: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-13Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 3-30reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according to par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 2 0 = No action 3-30external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according to par. 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 3-30the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 3-312 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 3-311 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0 % 1.0 % 100.0% 3-32break point current x InMOTOR
7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0 % 45.0% 3-32zero frequency current x InMOTOR
7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 3-33time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current
7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 3-33break point frequency
7. 10 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 3-341 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 3-34x InMOTOR
7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 3-34
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 3-34
7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 3-351 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 3-35weakening area load x TnMOTOR
7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 3-35zero frequency load x TnMOTOR
7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0s 3-36
![Page 161: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
Page 3-14 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = not in use 3-36number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart: multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 3-36attempt maximum trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 3-37start function 1 = Flying start
8. 4 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37undervoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 5 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37overvoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 6 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37overcurrent trip 1 = Yes
8. 7 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37reference fault trip 1 = Yes
8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 3-37over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault trip
Table 3.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.
![Page 162: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-15Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3.5.2 Description of Groups 2—8 parameters
2. 1 Start/Stop logic selection
0: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 3.5-1.
Figure 3.5-1 Start forward/Start reverse.
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority
2 When DIA1 contact opens, the direction of rotation starts to change
3 If Start forward (DIA1) and start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.
1: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 3.5-2.
Figure 3.5-2 Start, Stop, reverse.
DIA1
DIA2
1 2 3
t
UD009K09
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
FWD
REV
DIA1
DIA2
t
UD012K10
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7= coasting
FWD
REV
![Page 163: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
Page 3-16 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
2: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = start enabled open contact = start disabled
3: 3-wire connection
DIA1: closed contact = start pulseDIA2: closed contact = stop pulse(DIA3 can be programmed for reverse command)See figure 3.5-3.
2. 2 DIA3 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the contact is closed
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is open
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward Can be used for reversing ifcontact closed = Reverse parameter 2. 1 has value 3
6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for freq. refer.
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec. operation prohibitedcontact closed = Stops acceleration or deceleration until
the contact is opened
9: DC-braking commandcontact closed = In Stop mode, the DC-braking operates
until the contact is opened, see figure 3.5-4. DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
See also param. 7.2!
t
min 50 ms
UD009K11
FWD
REV
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
If Start and Stop pulses are simultaneous the Stop pulseoverrides the Start pulse
DIA1Start
DIA2Stop
Figure 3.5-3 Start pulse /Stop pulse.
![Page 164: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-17Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Figure 3.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop mode = Ramp,b) Stop mode = Coasting.
2. 3 Vin signal range
0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom maximum (par. 2. 5)
2. 4 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum
2. 5 These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.
Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2.4,press the Enter button
Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2.5,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/
t
UD009K32
Param. 4. 10
DIA3
t
UD009K32
DIA3
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting
![Page 165: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
Page 3-18 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
arrow down buttons).
2. 6 Vin signal inversion
Vin is source B frequencyreference, par. 1. 6 = 1 (default)
Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal
Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversionof analog Vin signalmax. Vin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Vin signal = maximum setspeed
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 7
t [s]
UD009K15
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
10 V0 Param. 2.4Ch012K46
Outputfrequency
Vin(term. 2)
Vin = custom
Vin = 0—10 V
Parameter2.16
Parameter2.17
Parameter 2.3 =0
Parameter 2.3=1
Param. 2.5
Figure 3.5-5 Vin no signal inversion
Figure 3.5-6 Vin signal inversion.
Figure 3.5-7 Vin signal filtering.
2. 7 Vin signal filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. Along filtering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 3.5-7.
Par. 2.17
Par. 2.16
Par. 2.4 Par. 2.5 10V
Par. 2.3=0Vin = 0-10 V
UD12K47
Output frequency
VinTerm. 2
Par. 2.3 = 1Vin = custom
![Page 166: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-19Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
2. 8 Analog input Iin signal range
0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span
See figure 3.5-8.
2. 9 Analog input Iin custom2. 10 setting minimum/maximum
With these parameters you canscale the input current tocorrespond to a minimum andmaximum frequency range. Seefigure 3.5-8.
Minimum setting: Set the Iin signalto its minimum level, selectparameter 2. 9, press the EnterbuttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximumlevel, select parameter 2. 10,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values canonly be set with this procedure(not with arrow up/arrow downbuttons).
2. 11 Analog input Iin inversion
Iin is source A frequencyreference, par. 1. 5 = 0 (default)
Parameter 2. 11 = 0, noinversion of Iin input
Parameter 2. 11 = 1, inversionof Iin input, see figure 3.5-9.
max. Iin signal = minimum setspeedmin. Iin signal = maximum setspeed
2. 12 Analog input Iin filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes drive responseslower. See figure 3.5-10.
20 mA0
Par. 2. 13
Par. 2. 14
Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 10
Par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
4 mA
Par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
UD012K28
Outputfrequency
Iin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
20 mA0
Par. 2. 13
Par. 2. 14
Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 104 mA
UD012K29
Outputfrequency
Uin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 12
t [s]
UD009K30
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 3.5-8 Analog input Iin scaling.
Figure 3.5-9 Iin signal inversion.
Figure 3.5-10 Analog input Iin filter time.
Iin
![Page 167: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Page 3-20 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
2. 13, 2. 14 Reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value
Scales the basic reference.
Setting limits: par. 1. 1 <par. 2. 13<par. 2. 14 <par. 1. 2.If par. 2. 14 = 0 scaling is set off. See figures 3.5-11 and 3.5-12.
Use this parameter to select afunction for a free analog inputsignal:
0 = Function is not used
1 = Reducing motor cur- rent limit (par. 1. 7)
This signal will adjust themaximum motor currentbetween 0 and the maximum setwith parameter 1. 7.See figure 3.5-13.
100
par. 2. 4
par. 2. 5
Ch012K12
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
100 Ch012K13
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
100%Par. 1. 7
UD012K61
Torque limit
Analoginput
Signal range0 V0 mA4 mACustom
10 V20 mA20 mACustom
2. 18 Free analog input signal
Selection of input signal of free analog input (an input not used for reference signal):
0 = Not in use1 = Voltage signal Vin2 = Current signal Iin
2. 18 Free analog input signal function
Figure 3.5-11 Reference scaling Figure 3.5-12 Reference scaling,par. 2. 14 = 0.
Figure 3.5-13 Reducing max. motor current.
![Page 168: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-21Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
2= Reducing DC brake current.
DC braking current can bereduced with the free analoginput signal between current 0.15x InHV9 and current set by theparameter 4. 8. See figure 3.5-14.
Figure 3.5-15 Reducing acceleration and deceleration times.
0
100%Par. 4. 8
0,15 x InFU
UD012K58
DC-brakingcurrent
Free analoginput
Signal range
10
1
Ch012K59
2
Factor R
Free analoginput
Signal range
0
100%Par. 3. 14
Ch012K60
Torque limit
Free analoginput
Signal range
0.15 x InHV9
Figure 2.5-14 Reducing DC brake current.
3 = Reducing accelerationand decelerationtimes.
Acceleration/deceleration timescan be reduced with a free analoginput signal according to thefollowing formulas:
Reduced time = set acc./deceler. time (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4.3, 4. 4) divided by the factor Rfrom the figure 3.5-15.
4 = Reducing torque super-vision limit.
Torque supervision limit can bereduced with a free analog inputsignal between 0 and setsupervision limit (par. 3. 14), seefigure 3.5-16.
Figure 3.5-16 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.
![Page 169: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
Page 3-22 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3. 1 Analog output function
See table for parameter 3.1 onpage 3-9.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 3.5-17.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max. output signal = minimumset valuemin. output signal = maximumset value
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA (livingzero). See figure 3.5-19.
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 3.5-17 Analog output filtering.
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 3.5-18 Analog output invert.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 3.5-19.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyOutput 2 x I
nHV9
currentMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Motor torque 2 x TnMot
Motor power 2 x PnMot
Motor voltage 100% x VnMot
DC-link volt. 1000 V
Figure 3.5-19 Analog output scale.
![Page 170: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-23Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content0 = Not used Out of operationDigital output DO1 sinks current and programmable relay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1 - if analog
reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed selected The Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision limit
supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay
(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. push-button#219= Drive temperature supervision Temperature on drive goes outside the set supervision
limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the
requested one21= External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par 3.17 and 3.18), output
active when brake control is OFF
Table 3.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11).See figure 3.5-20.
![Page 171: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
Page 3-24 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3. 13 Torque limit , supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofthe parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD009K19
Example:
3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value
The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3.13.Torque supervision value can be reduced below the setpoint with al free analog inputsignal, see parameters 2.18 and 2.19.
3. 15 Reference limit , supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 and via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised reference isthe current active reference. It can be the source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or the panel reference if the panel is the active control source.
3. 16 Reference limit , supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.
3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay
Par. 3.9 = 2
The function of the external brakecan be delayed from the start andstop control signals with theseparameters. See figure 3.5-21.
The brake control signal can beprogrammed via the digital outputDO1 or via one of the relay outputsRO1 and RO2, see parameters 3.6—3. 8.
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
t
a)
t
b)
UD012K45
DIA1: RUN FWD
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: RUN REV
STOP
DIA1: START
PULSE
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: STOP
PULSE
Figure 3.5-20 Output frequency supervision.
Figure 3.5-21 External brake control:a) Start/Stop logic selection par.2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b) Start/Stop logic selection par.2. 1 = 3.
![Page 172: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-25Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the temperature of the unit goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 20 Drive temperature limit value
The temperature value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 19.
4. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp timeset by parameters 1. 3,1. 4 (4. 3,4. 4 for Acc/Dec time 2).
Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 3.5-22.
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
4. 3 Acceleration time 2
4. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmablesignal DIA3. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can be reducedwith a free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
Figure 3.5-22 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
![Page 173: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
Page 3-26 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of the motorand the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor is selectedcorrectly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that ofacceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolongedacceleration times).
Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:
0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stopcommand.
Ramp:
1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated accordingto the deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high itmay be necessary to use an external braking resistor for fasterdeceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Determines whether DC braking is ON or OFF. It also determines the braking durationtime of the DC-brake when the motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brakedepends on the stop function, parameter 4. 7. See figure 3.5-23.
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function(param. 4. 7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:
![Page 174: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-27Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), the value ofparameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is < 10% of thenominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9.
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After a Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelerationramp parameter. If no regeneration occurs due to load inertia DC-braking starts at aspeed defined by parameter 4. 10.
fout fout
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9
UD009K21RUNSTOP
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON 0,1x fn
The braking time is defined withparameter 4.9.
If a high inertia exists it isrecommended to use an externalbraking resistor for fasterdeceleration. See figure 3.5-24.
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop
See figure 3.5-24.
t = param. 4. 9
t
Param. 4. 10
fout
UD009K23
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
RUNSTOP
[Hz] [Hz]
[Hz]
Figure 3.5-24 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp.
Figure 3.5-23 DC-braking time when stop = coasting.
![Page 175: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
Page 3-28 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
4. 11 DC-brake time at start
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is active when thestart command is given. Thisparameter defines the timebefore the brake is released.After the brake is released,the output frequencyincreases according to theset start function parameter4. 6 and the accelerationparameters (1.3, 4.1 or 4.2,4.3). See figure 3.5-25.
.
5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency areaLow limit/High limit
In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions between 0 Hzand 500 Hz. The accuracy of thesetting is 0.1 Hz. See figure 3.5-26.
t
UD009K22
Par 4. 11
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6
UD012K33
Reference [Hz]
Outputfrequency [Hz]
fout [Hz]
Figure 3.5-25 DC-braking time at start
Figure 3.5-26 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting.
![Page 176: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-29Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
6. 1 Motor control mode0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequency
references and the drive controls the output frequency (outputfreq. resolution 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed referencesand the drive controls the motor speed (control accuracy ±0.5%).
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the current capacity of the HV9000.
Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp) checkthe drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter 5.2 of theUser's Manual.
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltagereaches the set maximum value. Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value.Below that frequency output voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curveparameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 3.5-27.
When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening pointand the maximum output voltage, change these parameters after settingparameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the middle frequency point of the curve. See figure 3.5-27.
6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of thecurve. See figure 3.5-27.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, thisparameter defines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 3.5-27.
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
![Page 177: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Page 3-30 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
36. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used.
7. 1 Response to the reference fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, stop mode after fault always by coasting
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Figure 3.5-27 Programmable V/Hz curve.
![Page 178: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-31Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling of the
motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust or dirt.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.
Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection
General
Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000 driveis capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith a separately powered external fan, the load derating at low speed is small.
Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the motor is poweredfrom the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the ambienttemperature of the motor is 40°C.
Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. The thermalcurrent IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded. Thiscurrent limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 3.5-28. The default values of theseparameters are set from the motor nameplate data.
With the output current at IT the thermal stage will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal stage changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal stage will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT thethermal stage would reach 144% . The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5) ifthe thermal state reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermal stageis determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor, the longerit takes to reach the final temperature.
The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).
7. 5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
![Page 179: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
Page 3-32 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3Par. 7. 6
Par. 7. 7
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9
Overload area
Currentlimit
7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current
The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer tofigure 3.5-28.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor.If an external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).
The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current, pa-rameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal cur-rent is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically re-stored to the default value.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximumoutput current of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum out-put current of the drive.
Deactivating the stall protection by setting the parameter to 0 will reset the stall timecounter to zero.
7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current
The current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. See figure 3.5-28.
The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.
The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directon-line use without being overheated.
If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1.13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.
[Hz
Figure 3.5-28 Motor thermal current IT curve.
![Page 180: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-33Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant
This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes. This is the thermal time constantof the motor. The larger the motor the greater the time constant. The time constantis defined as the time that it takes the calculated thermal stage to reach 63% of itsfinal value.
The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies between differentmotor manufacturers.
The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motor nameplatedata from parameters 1.12 and 1.13. If either of these parameters is reset, then thisparameter is set to default value.
If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time constantparameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermaltime constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motor can safelyoperate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the time constant isinternally increased to three times the set parameter value. Cooling in the stopstage is based on convection with an increased time constant.
7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency
The frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz. This is the frequency break point ofthe thermal current curve. With frequencies above this point, the thermal capacity ofthe motor is assumed to be constant. See figure 3.5-28.
The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of thefrequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter1. 11 or 6. 3 will restore this parameter to its default value.
7. 10 Stall protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage. Setting the parameterto 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall time counter to zero.
105%
par. 7. 5
Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
I/IT
UMCH7_92
Trip area
Motor temperature
TimeMotor temperature
Time constant T*)
*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8
Trip/warningMotorcurrent
Figure 3.5-29 Calculating motor temperature.
![Page 181: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
Page 3-34 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral
Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is actually no realindication of the shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
7. 11 Stall current limit
The current can be set between 0.0—200% x InMotor.
In a stall the current has to be above this limit. See figure 3.5-30. The value is set asa percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current, parameter 1. 13. If parameter1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its default value.
7. 12 Stall time
The time can be set between2.0—120 s. This is the maximumallowed time for a stall. There isan internal up/down counter tocount the stall time. See figure3.5-31. If the stall time countervalue goes above this limit theprotection will cause a trip (referto parameter 7. 10).
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency
The frequency can be setbetween 1—fmax (parameter 1.2).In a stall, the output frequencyhas to be smaller than thislimit.See figure 3.5-30.
Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17Underload protection, General
The purpose of motor underloadprotection is to ensure that thereis load on the motor while thedrive is running. If the motor loadis reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g.broken belt or dry pump.
Motor underload protection canbe adjusted by setting theunderload curve with parameters7. 15 and 7. 16. The underloadcurve is a squared curve setbetween zero frequency and the
Par. 7. 12
UMCH7_12
Trip area
Time
Stall time counter
StallNo stall
Trip/warningpar. 7. 10
f
I
Par. 7. 11
Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11
Stall area
Figure 3.5-31 Counting the stall time.
Figure 3.5-30 Setting the stall characteristics.
[Hz]
![Page 182: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-35Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
field weakening point. The protection is not active below 5Hz (the underloadcounter value is stopped). See figure 3.5-32.
The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and drive's nominal current ICT areused to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than a standardmotor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation is decreased.
7. 14 Underload protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Fault
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.
7. 15 Underload protection, field weakening area load
The torque limit can be set between 20.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque when the outputfrequency is above the field weakening point. See figure 3.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 isadjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its default value.
7. 16 Underload protection, zero frequency load
The torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.Refer to the figure 3.5-32. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 17 Underload time
This time can be set between 2.0—600.0 s.
This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. Refer to the figure 3.5-33.If the underload counter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip(refer to the parameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped, the underload counter is resetto zero.
Figure 3.5-33 Counting the underload time.
Par. 7. 17
UMCH7_17
Trip area
Time
Underload time counter
Underl.No underl.
Trip/warningpar. 7. 14
P a r. 7 . 1 5
C h C H 7 _ 1 5
P a r. 7 . 1 6
f5 H z
U n d e r lo a d a r e a
T o r q u e
F ie ld w e a k e n in gp o in t p a r. 6 . 3
Figure 3.5-32 Setting of minimum load.
[Hz]
![Page 183: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
Page 3-36 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
4
3
2
1
t
UD012K25
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
ttrial ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4 - 8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3. See figure 3.5-34.
Figure 3.5-34 Automatic restart.
Parameter 8.1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8.2.
The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the count is cleared afterthe trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:
0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent trip
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults
![Page 184: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
HV9000 Page 3-37Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Notes:
8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)
8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.
![Page 185: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Page 3-38 HV9000Multi-step Speed Control Application
3
Notes:
![Page 186: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-1PI-control Application
4
CONTENTS
4 PI-control Application .......................4-1
4.1 General ........................................4-24.2 Control I/O....................................4-24.3 Control signal logic .......................4-34.4 Parameters Group 1 ....................4-4
4.4.1 Parameter table ..................4-44.4.2 Description of Group1 par ...4-5
4.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8 .. 4-84.5.1 Parameter tables .................. 4-84.5.2 Description of Groups. ........ 4-15
4.6 Panel reference ............................ 4-364.7 Monitoring data. ............................ 4-36
PI-CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 5)
![Page 187: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
Page 4-2 HV9000PI-control Application
4
4.1 General
In PI-control application there are two I/O-terminal control sources. Source A is the PI-controller and source B is the direct frequencyreference. The control source is selected withDIB6 input.
The PI-controller reference can be selectedfrom an analog input, motorized (digital)potentiometer or panel reference. The actual
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, PI-controller reference valuevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, PI-controller actual value
5 Iin- current (programmable) range 0—20 mA
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND Control voltage ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource A (PI-controller) Contact closed = start
9 DIA2 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault
10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = fault reset
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource B (Direct freq. ref.) Contact closed = start
15 DIB5 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = Jog speed
16 DIB6 Source A/B selection Contact open = source A is activeContact closed = source B is active
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Analog output Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Output frequency Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable ( par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 RUN
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable ( par. 3. 8 )
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
Figure 4.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of thePI-Control Application with 2-wire transmitter.
220VACMax.
RUN
READY
FAULT
4.2 Control I/O
value can be selected from the analog inputsor from mathematical functions of the analoginputs.
The direct frequency reference can be usedfor control without the PI-controller. Thefrequency reference can be selected fromanalog inputs or panel reference.
* NOTE! Remember to connect CMA andCMB inputs.
PI-controllerreference value
-+
Actualvalue
I(0)4..20mA
2-wiretransmitter
![Page 188: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-3PI-control Application
4
Figure 4.3-1 Control signal logic of the PI- Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.
The logic flow of the I/O-control signals and pushbutton signals from the panel is shown in figure4.3-1.
4.3 Control signal logic
!
"#
$!#$%
%$"$# "#%#
&'()&(
"*"+,
&-.
/-(++-/-.0-
+1
%2%334$"##!-
3++56,++&(
7+0-.,6-.(+8+09:
%3$#$%"--"+(--&;-.(;--"+(--&;-.(;--7+0-.,6-&;
"+(-*-.(+
(++
%&(<"+(-
%&(<"+(-
(=
,
(-=.(+>---------------------------------?-------
"*"+,<-.+(-
"*"+,<-.+(-
$?-&8+09:
$?;-&-.8+09:
![Page 189: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Page 4-4 HV9000PI-control Application
4
4.4 Basic parameters, Group 1
4.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 4-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 4-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 4-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 4-5
1. 5 PI-controller gain 1—1000% 1 % 100% 4-5
1. 6 PI-controller I-time 0.00—320.00 s 0.01s 10.00 s 0 = no Integral time in use 4-5
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 4-5
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 4-51 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 4-61 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 4-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 4-7of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 4-7of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the nameplate of 4-7of the motor the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 4-7
380—400 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 575 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 4-70 = All parameter groups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 4-70 = Changes enabled1 = Changes disabled
Table 4.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed
only when the drive is stopped.
** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominal size HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.
* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system. Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 4-5.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 190: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-5PI-control Application
4
4.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum / maximum frequency
Defines frequency limits of the HV9000.
The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2= 120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1.2 are changed to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel is changedfrom 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1.2= 119 Hz while the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time 1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceler-ate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2).
1. 5 PI-controller gain
This parameter defines the gain of the PI-controller.
If this parameter is set to 100%, a 10% change in error value causes the controlleroutput to change by 1.0 Hz.
If the parameter value is set to 0, the PI-controller operates as an I-controller.
1. 6 PI-controller I-time
Defines the integration time of the PI-controller
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will pro-vide short term.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the con-stant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point
0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 4.4-2.A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.
This default setting should be used if there is no special requirement foranother setting.
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form withthe frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is supplied to the motor. Seefigure 4.4-2.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening point and producesless torque and electromechanical noise. A squared V/Hz ratio can be used inapplications where the torque demand of the load is proportional to the square ofthe speed, e.g. in centrifugal fans and pumps.
![Page 191: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
Page 4-6 HV9000PI-control Application
4
!
Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 4.5.2. 2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings do
not satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 4.4-3.
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]Vn
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
V [V]
Vn Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor
Field weakening point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
Figure 4.4-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves
Figure 4.4-3 Programmable V/Hz curve.
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor produce enough torque to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.
Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where starting torque due tostarting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor will overheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions, specialattention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use external cooling for themotor if the temperature rise is too high.
Default: nominalvoltage of the motor
![Page 192: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-7PI-control Application
4
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to100% x Vnmotor.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency of the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protectionfunction uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6. See table 4.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = all parametergroups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
To adjust more of the functions of the PI-Control application, see chapter 4.5 tomodify the parameters of Groups 2—8.
![Page 193: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Page 4-8 HV9000PI-control Application
4
4.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—8
4.5.1 Parameter tables
Group 2, Input signal parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 1 DIA2 function 0—10 1 1 0 = Not used 4-15(terminal 9) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) pot. UP
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—10 1 7 0 = Not used 4-16(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) pot. DOWN
2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 4-161 = Custom setting range
2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 4-16
2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 4-16
2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 4-161 = Inverted
2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 4-17
2. 8 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 4-171 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range
2. 9 Iin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 4-17
2. 10 Iin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 4-17
2. 11 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 4-171 = Inverted
2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 4-18
2. 13 DIB5 function 0—9 1 6 0 = Not used 4-18(terminal 15) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 194: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-9PI-control Application
4
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 14 Motor (digital) 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 4-18potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s
2. 15 PI-controller reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 4-19signal (source A) 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)
2= Set reference from the panel (reference r2)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 is stopped
2. 16 PI-controller actual 0—3 1 0 0 = Actual value 1 4-19value selection 1 = Actual 1 + Actual 2
2 = Actual 1 - Actual 23 = Actual 1 * Actual 2
2. 17 Actual value 1 input 0—2 1 2 0 = No 4-191 = Voltage input2 = Current input
2. 18 Actual value 2 input 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-191 = Voltage input2 = Current input
2. 19 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0 % = No minimum scaling 4-19min scale +320.00%
2. 20 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.0% 100 % = No maximum scaling 4-19max scale +320.00%
2. 21 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0 % = No minimum scaling 4-19min scale +320.00%
2. 22 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.0% 100 % = No maximum scaling 4-19max scale +320.00%
2. 23 Error value inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-191 = Yes
2. 24 PI-controller min. limit fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-20(1. 1) (1. 2)
2. 25 PI-controller max. limit fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 4-20(1. 1) (1. 2)
2. 26 Direct frequency 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 4-20reference, source B 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)
2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r1)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 stopped
2. 27 Source B reference 0— 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 4-20scaling minimum value par. 2. 28 corresponds to the min.
reference signal
2. 28 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 4-20scaling maximum value (1. 2) corresponds to the max.
reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 195: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
Page 4-10 HV9000PI-control Application
4
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 4-211 = O/P frequency (0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 4-21
3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 4-211 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 4-211 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 4-21
3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 4-221 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output freq. limit superv. 114 = Output freq. limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit
supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—21 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 4-22
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—21 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 4-22
3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-22supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-22supervision value (par. 1. 2)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 196: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-11PI-control Application
4
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 11 Output freq. limit 2 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-22supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 12 Output freq. limit 2 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-22supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 4-23supervision value xTnHV9
3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 16 Active reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-23supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 17 External brake off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 0.5 s 4-23
3. 18 External brake on-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 1.5 s 4-23
3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 4-23temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision 2 = High limit
3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 4-23 temperature limit
3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 4-21analog output function
3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s See parameter 3. 2 4-21analog output filter time
3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 4-21analog output inversion
3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 4-21analog output minimum
3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 4-21analog output scale
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 4-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./Dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 4-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 4-24
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 4-24
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 4-251 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 4-251 = Flying start
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
![Page 197: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
Page 4-12 HV9000PI-control Application
4
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 4-251 = Ramp
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x 4-25InHV9 (A) InHV9
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 4-25
4. 10 Turn on frequency of 0.1-10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 4-26DC-brake at ramp Stop
4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00—25.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 4-27
4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 4-27(1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-27range 1 low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 4-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 3 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-27range 2 low limit par. 5. 4
5. 4 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 4-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 5 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-27range 3 low limit par. 5. 6
5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = no prohibit frequency range 4-27range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 4-271 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0-16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6kHz Depends on Hp rating 4-27
6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 4-28 1. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 4-28weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz-curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 4-28point frequency
6. 6 V/Hz-curve mid 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 4-28point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 4-28zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 4-281 = Controller is in operation
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 4-281 = Controller is in operation
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 198: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-13PI-control Application
4
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 4-29reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according topar. 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 2 0 = No action 4-29external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according topar. 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 4-29the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 4-292 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 4-301 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0 % 1.0 % 100.0% 4-30break point current x InMOTOR
7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0 % 45.0% 4-30zero frequency current x InMOTOR
7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 4-31time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current
7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 4-31break point frequency
7. 10 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 4-321 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 4-32x InMOTOR
7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 4-33
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 4-33
7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 4-331 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150,.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 4-34weakening area load x TnMOTOR
7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 4-34zero frequency load x TnMOTOR
7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0s 4-34
![Page 199: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Page 4-14 HV9000PI-control Application
4
Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = not in use 4-34number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart: multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 4-34attempt maximum trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 4-35start function 1 = Flying start
8. 4 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-35undervoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 5 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-35overvoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 6 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-35overcurrent trip 1 = Yes
8. 7 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-35reference fault trip 1 = Yes
8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 4-35over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault trip
Table 4.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.
![Page 200: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-15PI-control Application
4
4.5.2 Description of Groups 2—8 parameters
2. 1 DIA2 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe input is active
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped whenthe input is not active
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse, only
one of them is required toreverse
6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for frequencyreference.
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration until
operation the contact is openedprohibited
9: DC-braking contact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operatescommand until the contact is opened, see figure 4.5-1.
DC-brake current is set with parameter 4.8.
10:Motor(digital) contact closed = Reference increases until the contact is pot. UP opened
Figure 4.5-1 DIA3 as DC-brake commandinput:a) Stop-mode = ramp,b) Stop-mode = coasting
t
UD012K32
Param. 4. 10
DIA3
t
UD012K32
DIA3
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
a) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp
b) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting
RUNSTOP
![Page 201: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
Page 4-16 HV9000PI-control Application
4
2. 2 DIA3 function
Selections are same as in 2.1 except :
10: Motor(digital) contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact is pot. DOWN opened
2. 3 Vin signal range
0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom maximum (par. 2. 5)
2. 4, 2. 5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum
These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.
Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 4,press the Enter button
Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)
2. 6 Vin signal inversion
Parameter 2. 6 = 0, no inversion of analog Vin signal.
Parameter 2. 6 = 1, inversion of analog Vin signal.
![Page 202: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-17PI-control Application
4
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 7
t [s]
UD009K15
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
2. 7 Vin signal filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal.A long filtering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 4.5-2.
2. 8 Analog input Iin signal range
0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span
2. 9 Analog input Iin custom2. 10 setting minimum/maximum
With these parameters you canscale the input current signal (Iin)signal range between 0—20 mA.
Minimum setting: Set the Iin
signal to its minimum level,select parameter 2. 9, press theEnter buttonMaximum setting:Set the Iin
signal to its maximum level,select parameter 2. 10, pressthe Enter button
Note! The parameter values can onlybe set with this procedure (notwith arrow up/arrow downbuttons)
2. 11 Analog input Iin inversion
Parameter 2. 11 = 0, no inversionof Iin input.
Parameter 2. 11 = 1, inversion ofIin input.
20 mA0
Par. 2. 13
Par. 2. 14
Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 10
Par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
4 mA
Par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
UD012K28
Outputfrequency
Iin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
20 mA0
Par. 2. 13
Par. 2. 14
Par. 2. 9 Par. 2. 104 mA
UD012K29
Outputfrequency
Uin(term. 3,4)
par. 2. 8 = 2Iin = custom
par. 2. 8 = 1Iin = 4—20 mA
par. 2. 8 = 0Iin = 0—20 mA
Figure 4.5-3 Analog input Iin scaling.
Figure 4.5-4 Iin signal inversion.
Iin[term.3,4]
Figure 4.5-2 Vin signal filtering.
![Page 203: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
Page 4-18 HV9000PI-control Application
4
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 12
t [s]
UD009K30
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
2. 12 Analog input Iin filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower.See figure 4.5-3.
2. 13 DIA5 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse, only
one of them is required toreverse
6: Jog speed contact closed = Jog speed selected for freqency reference
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration untiloperation the contact is openedprohibited
9: DC-braking contact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operatescommand until the contact is opened, see figure 4.5-1.
DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
2. 14 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Defines how fast the electronic motor (digital) potentiometer value changes.
Figure 4.5-5 Analog input Iin filter time.
![Page 204: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-19PI-control Application
4
2. 15 PI-controller reference signal
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF).
Reference r2 is the PI-controller reference, see chapter 4.7.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.
- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 3.
4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value of parameter 1. 5is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 andvalue of the parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.
2. 16 PI-controller actual value selection2. 17 Actual value 12. 18 Actual value 2
These parameters select the PI-controller actual value.
2. 19 Actual value 1 minimum scale
Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 4.5-6.
2. 20 Actual value 1 maximum scale
Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 4.5-6.
2. 21 Actual value 2 minimum scale
Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 2. See figure 4.5-6.
2. 22 Actual value 2 maximum scale
Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 2. See figure 4.5-6.
2. 23 Error value inversion
This parameter allows you to invert the error value of the PI-controller(and thusthe the operation of the PI-controller).
0
Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%
100
C h01 2K 34
100 140-30
004
100
0
Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%
1008030
10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA
76.5(15.3 mA)
17.7(3.5 mA)
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
004
10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0
16.88.8 20.0 mA
Figure 4.5-6 Examples of actual value scaling of PI-regulator.
![Page 205: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Page 4-20 HV9000PI-control Application
4
2. 24 PI-controller minimum limit2. 25 PI-controller maximum limit
These parameter set the minimum and maximum values of the PI-controller output.Parameter value limits: par 1.1 <par. 2. 24 <par. 2. 2 5.
2. 26 Direct frequency reference. Place B
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),
Reference r1 is the Place B reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3
- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 3.
4 Same as setting 3, but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value of the parameter1.5 is set to 3 or 4, value of the parameter 2. 1 is automatically set to 4 andvalue of the parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.
2. 27 Source B reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value
2. 28 Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 27 < par. 2. 28 < par. 1. 2.If par. 2. 28 = 0 scaling is set off.See figures 4.5-7 and 4.5-8.
(In the figures below the voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V is selected for source Breference)
100
Par. 2. 28
Par. 2. 27
Ch012K35
100
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
M ax freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
[Hz][Hz]
Figure 4.5-7 Reference scaling. Figure 4.5-8 Reference scaling, par. 2. 28 = 0
![Page 206: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-21PI-control Application
4
3. 1 Analog output Content
See table on page 4-10.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 4.5-9.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max output signal = minimum set valuemin output signal = maximum set value
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 4.5-9 Analog output filtering
Figure 4.5-10 Analog output invert.
Figure 4.5-1 Analog output scale.
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. Seefigure 4.5-9.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 4.5-11.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)frequencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V
![Page 207: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
Page 4-22 HV9000PI-control Application
4
3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content
0 = Not used Out of operation
Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:
1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted a fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1
- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning Always if a warning exists (see Table 7.10-1 in Users'
manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision
limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay
(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with progr. push-button #219= Drive Temperature on drive goes outside the set
temperature limit supervision supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the
requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.18 and 3.18)
output active when brake control is OFF
3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this function generatesa warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11).
See figure 4.5-12.
Table 4.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
![Page 208: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-23PI-control Application
4
3. 13 Torque limit , supervisionfunction
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital output DO1or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of theparameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value
The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13.
3. 15 Reference limit , supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervisedreference is the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference dependingon DIB6 input or panel reference if panel is the active control place.
3. 16 Reference limit , supervision valueThe frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.
3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay
The function of the external brake can be delayed from the start and stop controlsignals with these parameters. See figure 4.5-13.
The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofthe relay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 20 Drive temperature limit value
The temperature value to be supervised by parameter 3. 19.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD009K19
Example:
Par. 3.9 = 2
Figure 4.5-12 Output frequency supervision.
![Page 209: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
Page 4-24 HV9000PI-control Application
4
4. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 for Acc/Dectime 2).
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
Figure 4.5-13 External brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b)Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 3.
4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/deceleration times for one application. The active set can be selected with theprogrammable signal DIA3 of this application, see parameter 2. 2.
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
t
a)
t
b)
UD012K45
DIA1: RUN FWD
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: RUN REV
STOP
DIA1: START
PULSE
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: STOP
PULSE
Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve.See figure 4.5-14.
Figure 4.5-14 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
![Page 210: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-25PI-control Application
4
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of themotor and the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor isselected correctly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal tothat of acceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequencywithin the set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may extendthe acceleration times).
Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until theactual frequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to the set reference value at a rate determined by theacceleration/deceleration ramp parameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:
0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stopcommand.
Ramp:
1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high itmay be necessary to use an external braking resistor for fasterdeceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Defines the current injected into the motor during the DC braking.
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
Defines if braking is ON or OFF and the braking time of the DC-brake when the motoris stopping. The function of the DC-brake depends on the stop function, parameter4. 7. See figure 4.5-15.
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function, (param. 4.7), and the time depends on the value of parameter 4. 9:
![Page 211: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
Page 4-26 HV9000PI-control Application
4
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If the frequency is >nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11),setting value of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequencyis <10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter 4.9.
t = param. 4. 9
t
Param. 4. 10
fout
UD009K23
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
RUNSTOP
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop
See figure 4.5-16.
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After the stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on the decelera-tion ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to load inertia, to a speed de-fined with parameter 4. 10 where the DC-braking starts.
The braking time is defined with parameter 4. 9.
If high inertia exists it is recommended to use an external braking resistor forfaster deceleration. See figure 4.5-16.
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0,1 x par. 4. 9
UD012K21
0,1 x fn
RUN
STOP
RUN
STOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON
fout fout[Hz] [Hz]
[Hz]
Figure 4.5-15 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 0.
Figure 4.5-16 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 1.
![Page 212: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-27PI-control Application
4
4. 11 DC-brake time at start
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is active whenthe start command isgiven. This parameter de-fines the time before thebrake is released. After thebrake is released theoutput frequency increasesaccording to the set startfunction parameter 4. 6and the accelerationparameters (1. 3, 4. 1 or 4.2, 4. 3). See figure 4.5-17.
t
UD012K22
Par 4. 11
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
4. 12 Jog speed reference
Parameter value defines the Jog speed selected with the digital input.
5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency area,Low limit/High limit
In some systems it may benecessary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions. The accuracyof the setting is 0.1 Hz.
5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6
UD012K33
Reference [Hz]
Outputfrequency [Hz]
6. 1 Motor control mode
0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency(output freq. resolution 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed(control accuracy ± 0.5%).
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency. Increasing thefrequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000.Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz >40 Hp)check the drive derating in the curves shown in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in chapter5.2 of the User's Manual.
fout [Hz]
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
Figure 4.5-18 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting
Figure 4.5-17 DC-braking time at start
![Page 213: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
Page 4-28 HV9000PI-control Application
4
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value. Below that frequency output voltage depends on the settingof the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 4.5-19.
When parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point andthe maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1.10 and 1. 11.
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 4.5-19.
6. 6 VHz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure4.5-19.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 4.5-19..
Default: nominal frequencyof the motor
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Field weakeningpoint
Default: nominalvoltage of themotor
Figure 4.5-19 Programmable V/Hz curve
6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when the controllers are not used.
![Page 214: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-29PI-control Application
4
7. 1 Response to the reference fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if the 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The ground protection is always working and protects the frequency converter fromground faults with high current levels.
Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection
General
Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000drive is capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the loadrequires this high current there is a risk that the motor will be thermally over-loaded. This is true especially at low frequencies. With low frequencies thecooling effect of the motor fan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is re-duced. If the motor is equipped with an external fan, the load derating on lowspeed is small.
Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the am-bient temperature of the motor is 40°C.
Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.
![Page 215: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
Page 4-30 HV9000PI-control Application
4
This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 4.5-20. The default values ofthese parameters are set from the motor nameplate data.
With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT
the thermal stage would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7.5) if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of thethermal model is determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger themotor, the longer it takes to reach the final temperature.
The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).
7. 5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected , the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.
7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current
The current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. See figure 4.5-20.
The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current, parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.
The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directon-line use without being overheated.
If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.
7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current
The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. See figure 4.5-20.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. Ifan external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).
!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling
of the motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due todust or dirt.
![Page 216: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-31PI-control Application
4
Par. 7. 6
Par. 7. 7
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9
Overload area
Currentlimit
The value is set as a percentagevalue of the motor's nameplatenominal current, parameter 1. 13,not the drive's nominal outputcurrent. The motor's nominalcurrent is the current which themotor can stand in direct on-lineuse without being overheated.
If you change the parameter 1. 13this parameter is automaticallyrestored to the default value.
Setting this parameter (orparameter 1. 13) does not affectto the maximum output current ofthe drive. Parameter 1. 7 alonedetermines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.
. 7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant
This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes thecalculated thermal state to reach 63% of its final value.
The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies betweendifferent motor manufacturers.
The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters isreset, then this parameter is set to default value.
If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is stopped the timeconstant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value. Thecooling in the stop stage is based on convection with an increased time constant.
7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency
This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of the thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point, the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant.See figure 4.5-20.
The default value is based on the motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is35 Hz for a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% ofthe frequency at the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either pa-rameter 1. 11 or 6. 3 will restore this parameter to its default value.
Figure 4.5-20 Motor thermal current IT curve
[Hz]
![Page 217: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
Page 4-32 HV9000PI-control Application
4
105%
par. 7. 5
Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
I/IT
UMCH7_92
Trip area
Motor temperature
TimeMotor temperature
Time constant T*)
*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8
Trip/warningMotorcurrent
Figure 4.5-21 Calculating motor temperature.
Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral
Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than withmotor thermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11.Stall Current and 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limitand output frequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is notrue detection of shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
7. 11 Stall current limit
The current can be set between0.0—200% x InMotor.
In the stall stage the current hasto be above this limit. See figure4.5-22. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1.13, motor's nominal current. Ifparameter 1.13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 10 Stall protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage. Setting the parameterto 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall time counter to zero.
f
I
Par. 7. 11
Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11
Stall area
[Hz]
Figure 4.5-22 Setting the stall characteristics.
![Page 218: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-33PI-control Application
4
7. 12 Stall time
The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 4.5-23. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to parameter 7. 10).
Par. 7. 12
UMCH7_12
Trip area
Time
Stall time counter
StallNo stall
Trip/warningpar. 7. 10
Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17, Underload protectionGeneral
The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on themotor while the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.
Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below 5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 4.5-24.
The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICT
are used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.
7. 14 Underload protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Fault
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency
The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the outputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. Refer to figure 4.5-22.
Figure 4.5-23 Counting the stall time.
![Page 219: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
Page 4-34 HV9000PI-control Application
4
7. 15 Underload protection, field weakening area load
Torque limit can be set between20.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.See figure 4.5-24.If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 16 Underload protection, zero frequency load
Torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 4.5-24. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 17 Underload time
This time can be set between2.0—600.0 s.
This is the maximum allowedtime for an underload state.There is an internal up/downcounter to accumulate theunderload time. See figure 4.5-25.If the underload counter valuegoes above this limit, the protec-tion will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive isstopped, the underload counter isreset to zero.
Par. 7. 17
UMCH7_17
Trip area
Time
Underload time counter
Underl.No underl.
Trip/warningpar. 7. 14
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3. See figure 4.5-26.
Par. 7. 15
ChCH7_15
Par. 7. 16
f5 Hz
Underload area
Torque
Field weakeningpoint par. 6. 3
f [Hz]
Figure 4.5-24 Setting of minimum load.
Figure 4.5-25 Counting the underload time.
![Page 220: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-35PI-control Application
4
Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.
The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts doesnot exceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the counting iscleared after the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:
0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to normal
(DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to normal
(DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent trip
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults
8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA)
returns to the normal level (>4 mA)
8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after the heatsink temperature has returned to its
normal level between -10°C—+75°C.
4
3
2
1
t
UD012K25
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
ttrial ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2
Figure 4.5-26 Automatic restart.
![Page 221: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
Page 4-36 HV9000PI-control Application
4
4.6 Panel reference
The PI-control application has an extra reference (r2) for the PI-controller on the panel's refer-ence page. See table 4.6-1.
Reference Reference Range Step Functionnumber name
r 1 Frequency fmin—fmax 0.01 Hz Reference for panel control andreference I/O terminal Source B reference.
r 2 PI-controller 0—100% 0.1% Reference for PI-controllerreference
4.7 Monitoring data
The PI-control application has additional items for monitoring. See table 4.7-1
Number Data name Unit Description
n 1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor
n 2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed
n 3 Motor current A Measured motor current
n 4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of the unit
n 5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the unit
n 6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage
n 7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage
n 8 Temperature °C Temperature of the heat sink
n 9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days 1, not resettable
n 10 Operating hours, HH.hh Operating hours 2, can be reset with program-"trip counter" mable button #3
n 11 MW-hours MWh Total MW-hours, not resettable
n 12 MW-hours, MWh MW-hours, can be reset with programmable"trip counter" button #4
n 13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage at the terminal Vin+ (term. #2)
n 14 Current/analog input mA Current at terminals Iin+ and Iin- (term. #4, #5)
n 15 Digital input status, gr. A
n 16 Digital input status, gr. B
n 17 Digital and relay outputstatus
n 18 Control program Version number of the control software
n 19 Unit nominal power Hp Shows the horsepower size of the unit
n 20 PI-controller reference % Percent of the maximum reference
n 21 PI-controller actual value % Percent of the maximum actual value
n 22 PI-controller error value % Percent of the maximum error value
n 23 PI-controller output Hz
n 24 Motor temperature rise % 100%= temperature of motor has risen to nominal
1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of a dayTable 4.7-1 Monitored items. 2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of an hour
![Page 222: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
HV9000 Page 4-37PI-control Application
4
Notes:
![Page 223: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
Page 4-38 HV9000PI-control Application
4
This page intentionally left blank
![Page 224: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-1
5
MULTI-PURPOSE CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 6)
CONTENTS
5 Multi-purpose Control Application ...... 5-1
5.1 General ............................................. 5-25.2 Control I/O ........................................ 5-25.3 Control signal logic ........................... 5-35.4 Parameters Group 1 ........................ 5-4
5.4.1 Parameter table ...................... 5-45.4.2 Description of Group1 par. ...... 5-5
5.5 Special parameters, Groups 2-8 ...... 5-95.5.1 Parameter tables ..................... 5-95.5.2 Description of Group 2 par. ... 5-16
![Page 225: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-2 HV9000
5
Referencepotentiometer
5.2 Control I/O
READY
RUN
220VACMax.
FAULT
these functions.
Digital inputs DIA1 and DIA2 are reserved forStart/stop logic. Digital inputs DIA3—DIB6 areprogrammable for multi-step speed select, jogspeed select, motorized (digital potentiometer,external fault, ramp time select, ramp prohibit,fault reset and DC-brake command function.All outputs are freely programmable.
5 Multi-purpose Control Application
5.1 GeneralIn the Multi-purpose control application thefrequency reference can be selected from theanalog inputs, the joystick control, themotorized (digital) potentiometer and amathematical function of the analog inputs.Multi-step speeds and jog speed can also beselected if digital inputs are programmed for
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, Frequency referencevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, Default setting: not used
5 Iin- current (programmable) range 0—20 mA
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start forward Contact closed = start forward(programmable)
9 DIA2 Start reverse Contact closed = start reverse(Programmable)
10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = fault reset
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = jog speed
15 DIB5 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault
16 DIB6 Accel./deceler. time select Contact open = par. 1.3, 1.4 in use(programmable) Contact closed = par. 4.3, 4.4 in use
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Output frequency Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Analog output Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable (par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable (par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 RUN
23 RO1
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable (par. 3. 8)
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
Figure 5.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of theMulti-purpose Control Application.
![Page 226: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-3
5
5.3 Control signal logic
The logic flow of the I/O-control signals and pushbutton signals from the panel is shown in figure5.3-1.
Figure 5.3-1 Control signal logic of the Multipurpose Control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.
!" #$! #
%&'
!()
*)
+(#& &(, +(),- (,
&-.%&' /(*)),- (&-,#
0112 (
1,)')'/)3!( $(&!4(, ')('&-/!&(5,)! #,& 6
7&$),#8#& &
7&$),#8#& &
1&&,9/'& ,&! #
7&-()'/()#,&
3'&-:6
1((((! #()#,& (((7&-()'/(!.
'
&;
3'&-:6<()
= (!3'&-:6
##.%/#.(,()#3'&-:6
(>.
(<
>, ?
, @
>, (?((, >, ((((, ( , (((>, >, (=(( ,
![Page 227: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-4 HV9000
5
5.4 Basic parameters, Group 15.4.1 Parameter table
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0— fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 5-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 5-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 5-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 5-5
1. 5 Reference selection 0—9 1 0 0 = Vin 3 = Vin - Iin 5-51 = Iin 4 = Iin - Vin2 = Vin + Iin 5 = Vin * Iin6 = Vin joystick control7 = Iin joystick control8 = Signal from internal motor pot.9 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 is stopped
1. 6 Jog speed fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 5.0 Hz 5-6reference (1. 1) (1. 2)
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x InHV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 5-6
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 5-61 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/Hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 5-81 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 5-8of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the nameplate of 5-8of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the nameplate of 5-8of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the nameplate of 5-8of the motor the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 5-8
380—440 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 575 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 5-80 = All parameter groups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 5-80 = Changes enabled1 = Changes disabled
Note! = Parameter value can be changedonly when the drive is stopped.
Table 5.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
* If 1. 2 >motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system. Selecting 120/500 Hz range see page 5-5.
** Default value for a four pole motor anda nominal size drive.
*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case bycase.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 228: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-5
5
5.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum / maximum frequency
Defines frequency limits of the drive.The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 arechanged to 500 Hz. At the same time the panel reference resolution is changed from0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter1. 2 = 119 Hz when the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time 1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency toaccelerate from the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximumfrequency (par. 1. 2).
1. 5 Reference selection
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Reference is formed by adding the values of the analog inputs3 Reference is formed by subtracting the voltage input (Vin) value from the
current input (Iin) value.4 Reference is formed by subtracting the current input (Iin ) value from the
voltage input (Vin) value.5 Reference is formed by multiplying the values of the analog inputs6 Joystick control from the voltage input (Vin).
Signal range Max reverse Direction change Max forwardspeed speed
0—10 V 0 V 5 V +10 VCustom Par. 2. 7 x 10V In the middle of Par. 2. 8 x 10 V
custom range-10 V—+10 V -10 V 0 V +10 V
Warning! Use only -10V—+10 V signal range. If a custom or 0—10 V signalrange is used, the drive will run at the max. reverse speed if thereference signal is lost.
7 Joystick control from the current input (Iin).
Signal range Max reverse Direction change Max forwardspeed speed
0—20 mA 0 mA 10 mA 20 mACustom Par. 2. 13 x 20 mA In the middle of Par. 2. 14 x 20 mA
custom range4—20 mA 4 mA 12 mA 20 mA
Warning! Use only 4—20 mA signal range. If a custom or 0—20 mA signal rangeis used, the drive will run at the max. reverse speed if the control signalis lost. Set the reference fault (par. 7. 2) active when the 4—20 mA rangeis used, then the drive will stop with a reference fault if the referencesignal is lost.
!
!
![Page 229: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-6 HV9000
5
Note! When joystick control is used, the direction control is generated from thejoystick reference signal. See figure 5.4-1.
Analog input scaling, parameters 2. 16—2. 19 are not used when joystickcontrol is used.
Fout
Uin
hystereesi +/-2% (+/-0,2 V)
+10V
-10V
Fmax(par 1.2)
Fmin.(par 1.1)
Fmin.(par 1.1)
Fmax(par 1.2)
Fout
UinUin
+10V
-10V
Fmax(par 1.2)
Fmax(par 1.2)
If minimum frequency (par 1. 1) >0, If minimum frequency (par 1. 1) = 0,hysteresis is ± 2% at reversing point. there is no hysteresis at reversing point.
8 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA4 and DIA5.- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA4 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 20.
9 Same as setting 8 but the reference value is set to the minimum frequency(par. 1. 1) each time the HV9000 is stopped.When the value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 8 or 9, the value of parameters2. 4 and 2. 5 are automatically set to 11.
1. 6 Jog speed reference
Parameter value defines the jog speed selected with the digital input
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current that the HV9000 will provideshort term.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency in the0 constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point (par. 6. 3)
where a constant voltage (nominal value) is also supplied to the motor.See figure 5.4.-2. A linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torqueapplications.
This default setting should be used if there is no specialrequirement for another setting.
fout [Hz]fout [Hz]
VinVin
Fig. 5.4-1 Joystick control Vin signal -10 V—+10 V.
![Page 230: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-7
5
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve form 1 with the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied tothe motor. See figure 5.4.-2.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand ofthe load is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugalfans and pumps.
Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 1.5.2.
2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings donot satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 5.4.-3.
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
V [V]
Vn Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor
Field weakening point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
Figure 5.4.-2 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
Default: nominalvoltage of the motor
Figure 5.4-3 Programmable V/Hz curve.
![Page 231: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-8 HV9000
5
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor produce sufficient torque to start and run at low frequencies. Theboost voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.
Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where startingtorque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.If the motor has to run prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature rise is too high.
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to100% x Vnmotor.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency of the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6. See table 5.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = all parameter groups are visible1 = only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:
0 = parameter value changes enabled1 = parameter value changes disabled
To adjust more of the functions of the Multi-purpose application, see chapter 5.5 tomodify the parameters of Groups 2—8.
!
![Page 232: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-9
5
5.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—85.5.1 Parameter tables
Group 2, Input signal parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
DIA1 DIA2
2. 1 Start/Stop logic 0—3 1 0 0 = Start forward Start reverse 5-16selection 1= Start/Stop Reverse
2 = Start/Stop Run enable3 = Start pulse Stop pulse
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—9 1 7 0 = Not used 5-17(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command
2. 3 DIB4 function 0—10 1 6 0 = Not used 5-18(terminal 14) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 1
2. 4 DIB5 function 0—11 1 1 0 = Not used 5-18(terminal 15) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 211 = Motorized pot. speed up
2. 5 DIB6 function 0—11 1 4 0 = Not used 5-18(terminal 16) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Multi-Step speed select 311 = Motorized pot. speed down
2. 6 Vin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 5-191 = Custom setting range2 = -10—+10 V (can be used only with Joystick control)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 233: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-10 HV9000
5
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 7 Vin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 5-19
2. 8 Vin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 5-19
2. 9 Vin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 5-191 = Inverted
2. 10 Vin signal filter time 0.00 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 5-19
2. 11 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 5-191 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range
2. 12 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 5-20
2. 13 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 5-20
2. 14 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 5-201 = Inverted
2. 15 Iin signal filter time 0.01 —10.00 s 0.01 s 0.10 s 0 = No filtering 5-20
2. 16 Vin minimum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 5-20+320.00 %
2. 17 Vin maximum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 5-20+320.00 %
2. 18 Iin minimum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 5-20+320.00% .
2. 19 Iin maximum scaling -320.00%— 0.01 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 5-20+320.00 %
2. 20 Free analog input, 0—2 1 0 0 = Not use 5-21signal selection 1 = Vin (analog voltage input)
2 = Iin (analog current input)
2. 21 Free analog input, 0—4 1 0 0 = No function 5-21function 1 = Reduces current limit (par. 1.7)
2 = Reduces DC-braking current3 = Reduces acc. and decel. times4 = Reduces torque supervis. limit
2. 22 Motorized digital 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 5-22potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—7 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 5-231 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% x VnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00-10.00s 0.01 s 1.00 s 5-23
3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 5-231 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 5-231 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 5-23
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
![Page 234: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-11
5
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 6 Digital output function 0—21 1 1 0 = Not used 5-241 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output freq. limit superv. 114 = Output freq. limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit
supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—21 1 2 As parameter 3. 6 5-24
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—21 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 5-24
3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 11 Output freq. limit 2 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-24supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 12 Output freq. limit 2 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-24supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-25supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 14 Torque limit -200.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 5-25supervision value xTnHV9
3. 15 Reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-25supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 16 Reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-25supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 17 Extern. brake Off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s 5-25
3. 18 Extern. brake On-delay 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 1.5 s 5-25
3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 5-25temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit
3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1°C +40°C 5-25temperature limit value
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 235: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-12 HV9000
5
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 5-23analog output content
3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 5-23analog output filter time
3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 5-23analog output inversion
3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 5-23analog output minimum
3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 5-23analog output scale
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./Dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 5-26>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./Dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 5-26>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 5-27
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 5-27
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 5-271 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 5-271 = Flying start
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 5-271 = Ramp
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 0.1 A 0.5 x InHV9 5-27 x InHV9 (A)
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 5-28
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC- 0.1—10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 5-29brake during ramp Stop
4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00-25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 5-29
4. 12 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 5-29reference 1 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 13 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 15.0 Hz 5-29reference 2 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 14 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz 5-29reference 3 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 15 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 5-29reference 4 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 16 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 30.0 Hz 5-29reference 5 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 17 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 40.0 Hz 5-29reference 6 (1. 1) (1. 2)
4. 18 Multi-step speed fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz 5-29reference 7 (1. 1) (1. 2)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
![Page 236: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-13
5
Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-29range 1 low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 1 is off 5-29range 1 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 3 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-29range 2 low limit par. 5. 4
5. 4 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 2 is off 5-29range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 5 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-29range 3 low limit par. 5. 6
5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = Prohibit range 3 is off 5-29range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 5-291 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6 kHz Depends on Hp rating 5-30
6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 5-301. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 5-30weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 5-30point frequency
6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00 % Parameter maximum value = 5-30point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00 % 5-30zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 5-311 = Controller is operating
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 5-311 = Controller is operating
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 237: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-14 HV9000
5
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 5-31reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according to par 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 5-31external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according topar 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 5-31the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground fault protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 5-312 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 5-321 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0 % 1.0 % 100.0% 5-32break point current x InMOTOR
7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0 % 45.0% 5-33zero frequency current x InMOTOR
7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 5-33time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current
7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 5-34break point frequency
7. 10 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 5-341 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 5-35x InMOTOR
7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 5-35
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 5-35
7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 5-361 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 5-36weakening area load x TnMOTOR
7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 5-36zero frequency load x TnMOTOR
7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0s 5-36
![Page 238: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-15
5
Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = not in use 5-37number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart:multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 5-37attempt maximum trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 5-38start function 1 = Flying start
8. 4 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38undervoltage 1 = Yes
8. 5 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38overvoltage 1 = Yes
8. 6 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38overcurrent 1 = Yes
8. 7 Automatic restart of 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38reference fault 1 = Yes
8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 5-38over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault
Table 5.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—8.
![Page 239: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-16 HV9000
5
5.5.2 Description of Groups 2—8 parameters
2. 1 Start/Stop logic selection
0: DIA1: closed contact = start forwardDIA2: closed contact = start reverse,See figure 5.5-1.
DIA1
DIA2
1 2 3
t
UD009K09
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
FWD
REV
1 The first selected direction has the highest priority
2 When DIA1 contact opens, the direction of rotation starts to change
3 If Start forward (DIA1) and Start reverse (DIA2) signals are activesimultaneously, the Start forward signal (DIA1) has priority.
1: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = reverse open contact = forwardSee figure 5.5-2.
DIA1
DIA2
t
UD012K10
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7= coasting
FWD
REV
Figure 5.5-1 Start forward/Start reverse.
Figure 5.5-2 Start, Stop,reverse.
![Page 240: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-17
5
2: DIA1: closed contact = start open contact = stopDIA2: closed contact = start enabled open contact = start disabled
3: 3-wire connection (pulse control):
DIA1: closed contact = start pulseDIA2: closed contact = stop pulse(DIA3 can be programmed for reverse command)See figure 5.5-3.
2. 2 DIA3 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward Can be used for reversing ifcontact closed = Reverse parameter 2. 1 has value 3
6: Jog speed. contact closed = Jog speed selected for freq. reference
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec.operation contact closed = Stops acceleration or deceleration untilprohibited the contact is opened
9: DC-brakingcommand contact closed = In Stop mode, the DC-braking operates until
the contact is opened, see figure 5.5-4. DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
t
min 50 ms
UD009K11
FWD
REV
Output frequency
Stop function(par 4. 7)= coasting
If Start and Stop pulses are simultaneous the Stop pulseoverrides the Start pulse
DIA1Start
DIA2Stop
Figure 5.5-3 Start pulse /Stop pulse.
![Page 241: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-18 HV9000
5
2. 3 DIB4 function
Selections are same as in 2. 2 except :
10: Multi-Step contact closed = Selection 1 active speed select 1
2. 4 DIB5 function
Selections are same as in 2. 2 except :
10: Multi-Step contact closed = Selection 2 active speed select 2
11: Motor pot. contact closed= Reference decreases until the contact is UP opened
2. 5 DIB6 function
Selections are same as in 2. 2 except :
10: Multi-Step contact closed= Selection 3 active speed select 3
11: Motor pot. contact closed= Reference decreases until the contact is DOWN opened
t
UD012K32
Param. 4. 10
DIA3
t
UD012K32
DIA3
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
a) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp
b) DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting
RUNSTOP
Figure 5.5-4 DIA3 as DC-brake command input: a) Stop-mode = Ramp,b) Stop-mode = Coasting.
![Page 242: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-19
5
2. 6 Vin signal range
0 = Signal range 0—+10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 7) to custommaximum (par. 2. 8)2 = Signal range -10—+10 V , can be used only with Joystick control
2. 7 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum
2. 8 With these parameters, Vin can be set for any input signal span within 0—10 V.
Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 7, pressthe Enter button
Maximum setting:Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 8, pressthe Enter button
Note! These parameters can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)
2. 9 Vin signal inversion
Parameter 2. 9 = 0, no inversionof analog Vin signal.
Parameter 2. 9 = 1, inversion ofanalog Vin signal.
2. 10 Vin signal filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 5.5-5.
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 10
t [s]
UD009K37
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 5.5-5 Vin signal filtering.
![Page 243: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-20 HV9000
5
2. 11 Analog input Iin signal range
0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span
2. 12 Analog input Iin custom2. 13 setting minimum/maximum
With these parameters, the scaling of the input current signal (Iin) range can beset between 0—20 mA.
Minimum setting: Set the Iin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 12, pressthe Enter button
Maximum setting:Set the Iin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 13,press the Enter button
Note! These parameters can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 15
t [s]
UD012K40
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 5.5-6 Analog input Iin filter time.
2. 16 Vin signal minimum scalingSets the minimum scaling point for Vin signal. See figure 5.5-7.
2. 17 Vin signal maximum scaling
Sets the maximum scaling point for Vin signal. See figure 5.5-7.
2. 18 Iin signal minimum scaling
Sets the minimum scaling point for Iin signal. See figure 5.5-7.
2. 19 Iin signal maximum scaling
Sets the maximum scaling point for Iin signal. See figure 5.5-7.
2. 14 Analog input Iin inversion
Parameter 2. 14 = 0, noinversion of Iin inputParameter 2. 14 = 1, inversionof Iin input.
2. 15 Analog input Iin filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes driveresponse slower. See figure 5.5-6.
![Page 244: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-21
5
2. 20 Free analog input signal
Selection of input signal of free analog input (an input not used for referencesignal):
0 = Not in use1 = Voltage signal Vin2 = Current signal Iin
2. 21 Free analog input signalfunction
This parameter sets the functionof the free analog input:
0 = Function is not used
1 = Reducing motor current limit(par. 1. 7)
This signal will adjust themaximum motor currentbetween 0 and parameter1. 7 set max. limit.See figure 5.5-8.
2 = Reducing DC brake current.
The DC braking current can bereduced, with the free analoginput signal, between 0.15xInHV9and current set by parameter4. 8.See figure 5.5-9.
100%Par. 1. 7
Ch012K61
Torque limit
Analoginput
Signal range0 V0 mA4 mACustom
10 V20 mA20 mACustom
0
100%Par. 4. 8
Ch012K58
DC-brakingcurrent
Free analoginput
Signal range
0
Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%
100
C h012 K 34
100 140-30
004
100
0
Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%
1008030
10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA
76.5(15.3 mA)
17.7(3.5 mA)
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
004
10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0
16.88.8 20.0 mA
Figure 5.5-7 Examples of the scaling of Vin and Iin inputs .
Figure 5.5-8 Reducing the max. motor current.
Figure 5.5-9 Reducing the DC brake current.
![Page 245: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-22 HV9000
5
3 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.
The acceleration anddeceleration times can bereduced with the free analoginput signal, according to thefollowing formula:
Reduced time = set acc./deceltime (par. 1. 3, 1. 4; 4. 3, 4. 4)divided by the factor R fromfigure 5.5-10.
4 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.
The set torque supervision limitcan be reduced with the freeanalog input signal between 0and set supervision limit (par. 3.14), see figure 5.5-11.
2. 22 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Defines how fast the electronic motor (digital) potentiometer value changes.
10
1
Ch012K59
2
Factor R
Free analoginput
Signal range
0
100%Par. 3. 14
Ch012K60
Torque limit
Free analoginput
Signal range
Figure 5.5-10 Reducing acceleration anddeceleration times.
Figure 5.5-11 Reducing torque supervisionlimit.
![Page 246: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-23
5
3. 1 Analog output function
See table on page 5-10.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 5.5-12.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max output signal = minimum set valuemin output signal = maximum set value
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. Seefigure 5.5-14.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 5.5-14.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output fre- Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)quencyMotor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 V
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 5.5-13 Analog output invert.
Figure 5.5-12 Analog output filtering.
Figure 5.5-14 Analog output scale.
![Page 247: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-24 HV9000
5
3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content
0 = Not used Out of operation
Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:
1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1
- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning If a warning exists. See Table 7.10-1 in the Users'
Manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Jog speed Jog speed has been selected with digital input11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and 3. 14)16= Reference limit supervision Reference goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable delay
(par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with prog. pushbutton #219= Drive Temperature on drive goes outside the set temperature
supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the
requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18),
output active when brake control is OFF
Table 5.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11). See figure5.5-15.
![Page 248: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-25
5
3. 13 Torque limit , supervisionfunction
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital outputDO1, via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings ofparameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value
The calculated torque value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 13.
3. 15 Reference limit , supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised reference isthe current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or the panel reference if panel is the active control source.
3. 16 Reference limit , supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.
3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay
The function of the external brake can be delayed from the start and stop controlsignals with these parameters. See figure 5.5-16.
The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofrelay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 20 Drive temperature limit value
The temperature value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 19.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD009K19
Example:
Par. 3.9 = 2
Figure 5.5-15 Output frequency supervision.
![Page 249: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-26 HV9000
5
4. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with these
parameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you alinear ramp shape. The outputfrequency immediately follows theinput with a ramp time set byparameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 forAcc/Dec time 2).
Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1(4. 2) causes an S-shaped ramp.The speed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve.
See figure 5.5-17.
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
Figure 5.5-16 External brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b)Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 3.
Figure 5.5-17 S-shaped acceleration/ deceleration.
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
t
a)
t
b)
UD012K45
DIA1: RUN FWD
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: RUN REV
STOP
DIA1: START
PULSE
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: STOP
PULSE
![Page 250: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-27
5
4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with the programmable signalDIA3 of this application, see parameter 2. 2. Acceleration /deceleration times can bereduced with a external free analog input signal, see parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of the motorand the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor is selectedcorrectly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that ofacceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolongedacceleration times).
Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:
0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stopcommand.
Ramp:
1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high it maybe necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Defines the current injected into the motor during DC braking.
![Page 251: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-28 HV9000
5
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
Defines if braking is ON or OFF and braking time of the DC-brake when the motor isstopping. The function of the DC-brake depends on the stop function, parameter 4.7. See figure 5.5-18.
0 DC-brake is not used>0 DC-brake is in use and its function depends on the Stop function,
(param. 4. 7), and the time depends on the value of parameter 4. 9:
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortest possibletime, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC-braking starts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11),setting value of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequencyis < 10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter4.9.
t = param. 4. 9
t
Param. 4. 10
fout
UD009K23
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
RUNSTOP
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced based on thedeceleration parameter ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to loadinertia, to a speed defined with parameter 4. 10, where the DC-braking starts.
0,1x fn
The braking time is definedwith parameter 4. 9.
If high inertia exists, it isrecommended to use anexternal braking resistor forfaster deceleration. Seefigure 5.5-19.
fout fout
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9
UD009K21RUNSTOP
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON
[Hz]
[Hz][Hz]
Figure 5.5-18 DC-braking time when stop = coasting.
Figure 5.5-19 DC-braking time when stopfunction = ramp
![Page 252: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-29
5
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop
See figure 5.5-19.
4. 11 DC-brake time at start
0 DC-brake is not used>0 DC-brake is active when
the start command is given.This parameter defines thetime before the brake isreleased. After the brake isreleased the output freq-uency increases accordingto the set start functionparameter 4. 6 and theacceleration parameters (1.3, 4. 1 or 4. 2, 4. 3). Seefigure 5.5-20.
4. 12 - 4. 18 Multi-Step speeds 1-7
These parameter values define the Multi-step speeds selected with the DIA4, DIB5and DIB6 digital inputs. The selection of Multi-step speeds will occur similarly asdescribed in the table 3.4-2 page 3-8.
5. 1- 5.6 Prohibit frequency areaLow limit/High limit
In some systems it may be nec-essary to avoid certainfrequencies because ofmechanical resonanceproblems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three"skip frequency" regions. Theaccuracy of the setting is 0.1 Hz.
5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6
[Hz]
[Hz]
UD009K33
6. 1 Motor control mode
0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the outputfrequency (output frequency resolution = 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speedreferences and the drive controls the motor speed(regulation accuracy ± 0.5%).
fout
frequencyreference
t
UD009K22
Par 4. 11
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
fout [Hz]
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
Figure 5.5-21 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting
Figure 5.5-20 DC-braking at start.
![Page 253: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-30 HV9000
5
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized using a high switching frequency. Increasing theswitching frequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000.
Before changing the frequency from the factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz > 40 Hp),check the drive derating from the curves in figures 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 in the User'sManual.
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency at which the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above this frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value.Below that frequency the output voltage depends on the setting of the V/Hz curveparameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 5.5-22.
When the parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency ofthe motor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If you need different values for the field weakening point andthe maximum output voltage, change these parameters after setting parameters 1.10 and 1. 11.
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8, this parameterdefines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.
6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the middle point voltage of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 5.5-22.
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]Vn
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Figure 5.5-22 Programmable V/Hz curve.
Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor
![Page 254: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-31
5
6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON or OFF.This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than -15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers are ON, theywill change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage = faster,undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used
7. 1 Response to the reference fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if 4—20 mA reference signalis used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also be programmedvia digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external fault signalin the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed into digital outputDO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approximatelyequal current.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The standard overcurrent protection is always working and protects the frequencyconverter from ground faults with high current levels.
Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection
General
Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000 driveis capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the load requiresthis high current there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded. This is trueespecially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effect of the motorfan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motor is equippedwith an external fan the load reduction on low speed is small.
![Page 255: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-32 HV9000
5
Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state for the motor. The calculated model assumes that theambient temperature of the motor is 40°C.
Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9, refer to the figure 5.5-23. The default values ofthese parameters are set from the motor nameplate data.
With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal stage will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of ITthe thermal stage would reach 144%. The function will trip the device (refer par. 7.5) if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermalmodel is determined by the time constant parameter 7. 8. The larger the motor thelonger it takes to reach the final temperature.
The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).
CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling ofthe motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.
7. 5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.
7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current
The current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. See figure 5.5-23.
The value is set in percentage of the motor nameplate data of the motor, parameter1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current.
The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directon-line use without being overheated.
If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to the defaultvalue.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.
!
![Page 256: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-33
5
Par. 7. 6
Par. 7. 7
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9
Overload area
Currentlimit
7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current
The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. Refer to the figure 5.5-23.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. Ifan external fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).
The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominalcurrent is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without beingoverheated.
If you change the parameter 1. 13 this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum output currentof the drive.
7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant
This time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant of the motor. The larger the motor the greaterthe time constant. The time constant is defined as the time that it takes thecalculated thermal stage to reach 63% of its final value.
The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies betweendifferent motor manufacturers.
The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motornameplate data from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters is reset,then this parameter is set to its default value.
If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the timeconstant parameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motorthermal time constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motorcan safely operate at six times the rated current). If the drive is in the stop stagethe time constant is internally increased to three times the set parameter value.The cooling in the stop stage is based on convection with an increased timeconstant.
Figure 5.5-23 Motor thermal current IT
curve.
![Page 257: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-34 HV9000
5
7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency
This frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point of thermal current curve. With frequenciesabove this point the thermal capacity of the motor is assumed to be constant. Seefigure 5.5-23.
The default value is based on motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35 Hzfor a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of the frequencyat the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter 1. 11 or 6.3 will restore this parameter to its default value.
105%
par. 7. 5
Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
I/IT
UMCH7_92
Trip area
Motor temperature
TimeMotor temperature
Time constant T*)
*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8
Trip/warningMotorcurrent
Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral
Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit the stall state is true. There is no true detectionof shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
7. 10 Stall protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Setting this parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall timecounter to zero.
Figure 5.5-24 Calculating motor temperature.
![Page 258: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-35
5
f
I
Par. 7. 11
Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11
Stall area
7. 12 Stall time
The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 5.5-26. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to the parameter 7. 10).
Par. 7. 12
UMCH7_12
Trip area
Time
Stall time counter
StallNo stall
Trip/warningpar. 7. 10
Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17, Underload protectionGeneral
The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on themotor while the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be aproblem in the process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.
Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 5.5-27.
7. 11 Stall current limit
The current can be set between0.0—200% x InMotor.
In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure 5.5-25. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1. 13, motor's nominal current. Ifparameter 1.13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency
The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the ouputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. See figure 5.5-25.
[Hz]
Figure 5.5-25 Setting the stall characteristics.
Figure 5.5-26 Counting the stall time.
![Page 259: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-36 HV9000
5
The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICT
are used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other than astandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.
7. 14 Underload protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Fault
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.
7. 15 Underload protection, fieldweakening area load
The torque limit can be setbetween 20.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for theminimum allowed torque when theoutput frequency is above the fieldweakening point. See figure 4.5-22. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted,this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value
Par. 7. 15
UMCH7_15
Par. 7. 16
f5 Hz
Underload area
Torque
Fieldweakening point par. 6. 3
7. 16 Underload protection, zero frequency load
Torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 5.5-27. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 17 Underload time
This time can be set between 2.0—600.0 s.
This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. See figure 5.5-28. If the underloadcounter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped the underload counter is reset to zero.
f [Hz]
Figure 5.5-27 Setting of minimum load.
![Page 260: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-37
5
Par. 7. 17
UMCH7_17
Trip area
Time
Underload time counter
Underl.No underl.
Trip/warningpar. 7. 14
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3.
4
3
2
1
t
UD012K25
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
ttrial ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2
Figure 5.5-28 Counting the underload time.
Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.
The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts does notexceed the value of the parameter 8. 1 during the trial time, the counting is clearedafter the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again.
Figure 5.5-29 Automatic restart
![Page 261: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-38 HV9000
5
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:
0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage fault trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal
condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage fault trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent trip
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent fault trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults
8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA)
returns to the normal level (>4 mA)
8. 8 Automatic restart after over-/undertemperature fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.
![Page 262: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationHV9000 Page 5-39
5
Notes:
![Page 263: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
Multi-purpose Control ApplicationPage 5-40 HV9000
5
This page intentionally left blank
![Page 264: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-1Pump and fan control Application
6
PUMP AND FAN CONTROL APPLICATION(par. 0.1 = 7)
CONTENTS
6 Pump and fan control Application ................. 6-1
6.1 General ..................................................... 6-26.2 Control I/O ................................................ 6-26.3 Control signal logic .................................... 6-36.4 Basic parameters, Group 1 ....................... 6-4
6.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1 ................. 6-46.4.2 Description of Group1 parameters .... 6-5
6.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—9 ............. 6-86.5.1 Parameter tables, Groups 2—9 ........... 6-86.5.2 Description of Groups 2—9 param. 6-16
6.6 Monitoring data ....................................... 6-406.7 Panel reference ...................................... 6-41
![Page 265: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
Page 6-2 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6.1 General
The pump and fan control appliation can beselected by setting the value of parameter 0.1to 7.
The application can be used to control onevariable speed drive and 0-3 auxiliary drives.The PI-controller of the HV9000 controls thedrive speed and provides control signals toStart and Stop one to three auxiliary drives to
Terminal Signal Description
1 +10Vref Reference output Voltage for a potentiometer, etc.
2 Vin+ Analog input, PI-controller reference valuevoltage (programmable) range 0—10 V DC
3 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
4 Iin+ Analog input, PI-controller actual value
5 Iin- current (programmable) range 0—20 mA
6 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, etc. max. 0.1 A
7 GND Control voltage ground Ground for reference and controls
8 DIA1 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource A (PI-controller) Contact closed = start
9 DIA2 External fault Contact open = no fault(programmable) Contact closed = fault
10 DIA3 Fault reset Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = fault reset
11 CMA Common for DIA1—DIA3 Connect to GND or + 24V
12 +24V Control voltage output Voltage for switches, (same as #6)
13 GND I/O ground Ground for reference and controls
14 DIB4 Start/Stop Contact open = stopSource B (Direct freq. ref.) Contact closed = start
15 DIB5 Jog speed select Contact open = no action(programmable) Contact closed = jog speed
16 DIB6 Source A/B selection Contact open = source A is activeContact closed = source B is active
17 CMB Common for DIB4—DIB6 Connect to GND or + 24V
18 Iout+ Analog output Programmable (par. 3. 1)
19 Iout- Output frequency Range 0—20 mA/RL max. 500 Ω20 DO1 Digital output Programmable ( par. 3. 6)
READY Open collector, I<50 mA, V<48 VDC
21 RO1 Relay output 1 Programmable ( par. 3. 7)
22 RO1 Auxil. motor 1
23 RO1 control
24 RO2 Relay output 2 Programmable ( par. 3. 8 )
25 RO2 FAULT
26 RO2
Figure 6.2-1 Default I/O configuration and connection example of thePump and Fan Control Application with 2-wire transmitter.
220VACMax.
READY
control the total flow.
The application has two control sources onthe I/O terminals. Source A is Pump and fancontrol and source B is direct frequencyreference. The control source is selected withDIB6 input.
* NOTE! Remember to connect the CMAand CMB inputs.
220VAC
FAULT
PI-controllerreference value
6.2 Control I/O
Actualvalue
I(0)4..20mA
2-wiretransmitter
-+
![Page 266: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-3Pump and fan control Application
6
The logic flow of the I/O-control signals and pushbutton signals from the panel is shown in figure6.3-1.
6.3 Control signal logic
Figure 6.3-1 Control signal logic of the Pump and Fan control Application.Switch positions shown are based on the factory settings.
!
"#
$%
&#%&
&$&% $%%
'()*')
$+$,-
'./
0.),,.0./1.
,2
3445&!$!%%#.
4,,67-,, ')
8,1./-7./),9,1 :;
4&%&$..$,)..'<./)<..$,)..'<./)<..8,1./-7.'<
$,).+./),
),,
')=$,).
>(<.'<=$,).
)?!-
).?/),@.................................A.......
$+$,-=./,).
$+$,-=./,).
&A.'9,1 :;
&A<.'./9,1 :;
),.,''(<.'<.7),,.,1).,'A*.7?/
A<.7?.=./
A<.7?.=./
A<.7?. =./
![Page 267: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
Page 6-4 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6.4 Basic parameters, Group 1
6.4.1 Parameter table, Group 1
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
1. 1 Minimum frequency 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz 6-5
1. 2 Maximum frequency fmin-120/500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz * 6-5
1. 3 Acceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Time from fmin (1. 1) to fmax (1. 2) 6-5
1. 4 Deceleration time 1 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s Time from fmax (1. 2) to fmin (1. 1) 6-5
1. 5 PI-controllergain 1—1000% 1 % 100% 6-5
1. 6 PI-controller I-time 0.00—320.00 s 0.01s 10.00s 0= No Integral timein use 6-5
1. 7 Current limit 0.1—2.5 x InHV9 0.1 A 1.5 x In HV9 ***Output curr. limit [A] of the unit 6-5
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection 0—2 1 0 0 = Linear 6-51 = Squared2 = Programmable V/Hz ratio
1. 9 V/hz optimization 0—1 1 0 0 = None 6-61 = Automatic torque boost
1. 10 Nominal voltage 180—690 V 1 V 230 V Voltage code 2 6-7of the motor 380 V Voltage code 4
480 V Voltage code 5575 V Voltage code 6
1. 11 Nominal frequency 30—500 Hz 1 Hz 60 Hz fn from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor the motor
1. 12 Nominal speed 300—20000 rpm 1 rpm 1720 rpm nn from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor ** the motor
1. 13 Nominal current 2.5 x In HV9 0.1 A InHV9 In from the rating plate of 6-7of the motor( In Mot) the motor
1. 14 Supply voltage 208—240 230 V Voltage code 2 6-7
380—440 380 V Voltage code 4
380—500 480 V Voltage code 5
525—690 575 V Voltage code 6
1. 15 Parameter conceal 0—1 1 0 Visibility of the parameters: 6-70 = All parametergroups visible1 = Only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock 0—1 1 0 Disables parameter changes: 6-70 = Changes enabled1 = Changes disabled
Table 6.4-1 Group 1 basic parameters.
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed
only when the drive is stopped.
* If 1. 2 > motor synchr. speed, check suitability for motor and drive system Selecting 120 Hz/500 Hz range see page 6-5.
** Default value for a four pole motor and a nominal size HV9000.*** Up to M10. Bigger classes case by case.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 268: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-5Pump and fan control Application
6
6.4.2 Description of Group 1 parameters
1. 1, 1. 2 Minimum / maximum frequency
Defines frequency limits of the HV9000.
The default maximum value for parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 is 120 Hz. By setting 1. 2 =120 Hz when the drive is stopped (RUN indicator not lit) parameters 1. 1 and 1. 2 arechanged to 500 Hz. At the same time the resolution of the panel reference is changedfrom 0.01 Hz to 0.1 Hz.Changing the max. value from 500 Hz to 120 Hz is done by setting parameter 1. 2 =119 Hz when the drive is stopped.
1. 3, 1. 4 Acceleration time 1, deceleration time 1:
These limits correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency(par. 1. 2).
1. 5 PI-controller gain
This parameter defines the gain of the PI-controller.
If this parameter is set to 100%, a 10% change in error value causes the controlleroutput to change by 1.0 Hz.
If the parameter value is set to 0 the PI-controller operates as I-controller.
1. 6 PI-controller I-time
Defines the integration time of the PI-controller.
1. 7 Current limit
This parameter determines the maximum motor current what the HV9000 will supplyshort term.
1. 8 V/Hz ratio selection
Linear: The voltage of the motor changes linearly with the frequency inthe constant flux area from 0 Hz to the field weakening point
0 (par. 6. 3) where a constant voltage (nominal value) is supplied to themotor. See figure 6.4-1.Linear V/Hz ratio should be used in constant torque applications.
This default setting should be used if there is no special requirement foranother setting.
Squared: The voltage of the motor changes following a squared curve formwith the frequency in the area from 0 Hz to the field weakening
1 point (par. 6. 3) where the nominal voltage is also supplied to the motor.See figure 6.4-1.
The motor runs undermagnetized below the field weakening pointand produces less torque and electromechanical noise. A squaredV/Hz ratio can be used in applications where the torque demand of theload is proportional to the square of the speed, e.g. in centrifugal fansand pumps.
![Page 269: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
Page 6-6 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Programm. The V/Hz curve can be programmed with three different points.V/Hz curve The parameters for programming are explained in chapter 6.5.2.
2 A programmable V/Hz curve can be used if the standard settings donot satisfy the needs of the application. See figure 6.4-2.
1. 9 V/Hz optimization
Automatic The voltage to the motor changes automatically which makes thetorque motor to produce torque enough to start and run at low frequencies.boost The voltage increase depends on the motor type and horsepower.
Automatic torque boost can be used in applications where startingtorque due to starting friction is high, e.g. in conveyors.
NOTE! In high torque - low speed applications - it is likely the motor willoverheat.If the motor has to run for a prolonged time under these conditions,special attention must be paid to cooling the motor. Use externalcooling for the motor if the temperature tends to rise too high.
!
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
V [V]
Vn Default: Nominal voltage ofthe motor
Field weakening point
Linear
Squared
Default: Nominalfrequency of themotor
f [Hz]
Figure 6.4-1 Linear and squared V/Hz curves.
Figure 6.4-2 Programmable V/Hz curve.
![Page 270: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-7Pump and fan control Application
6
1. 10 Nominal voltage of the motor
Find this value Vn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the voltage at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 4, to100% x Vnmotor.
1. 11 Nominal frequency of the motor
Find the nominal frequency fn from the nameplate of the motor.This parameter sets the frequency at the field weakening point, parameter 6. 3, tothe same value.
1. 12 Nominal speed of the motor
Find this value nn from the nameplate of the motor.
1. 13 Nominal current of the motor
Find the value In from the nameplate of the motor.The internal motor protection function uses this value as a reference value.
1. 14 Supply voltage
Set parameter value according to the nominal voltage of the supply.Values are pre-defined for voltage codes 2, 4, 5 and 6. See table 6.4-1.
1. 15 Parameter conceal
Defines which parameter groups are available:
0 = All parameter groups are visible1 = Only group 1 is visible
1. 16 Parameter value lock
Defines access to the changes of the parameter values:
0 = Parameter value changes enabled1 = Parameter value changes disabled
![Page 271: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
Page 6-8 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6.5 Special parameters, Groups 2—9
6.5.1 Parameter tables
Group 2, Input signal parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 1 DIA2 function 0—10 1 1 0 = Not used 6-16(terminal 9) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog frequency7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) potent. UP
2. 2 DIA3 function 0—10 1 7 0 = Not used 6-17(terminal 10) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acceler./deceler. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog frequency7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command10 = Motor (digital) potent. DOWN
2. 3 Vin signal range 0—1 1 0 0 = 0—10 V 6-171 = Custom setting range
2. 4 Vin custom setting min. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 6-17
2. 5 Vin custom setting max. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 6-17
2. 6 Vin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 6-171 = Inverted
2. 7 Vin signal filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 0 = No filtering 6-17
2. 8 Iin signal range 0—2 1 0 0 = 0—20 mA 6-171 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom setting range
2. 9 Iin custom setting minim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 6-18
2. 10 Iin custom setting maxim. 0.00-100.00% 0.01% 100.00% 6-18
2. 11 Iin signal inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 6-181 = Inverted
2. 12 Iin signal filter time 0.01—10.00s 0.01s 1.00 s 0 = No filtering 6-18
2. 13 DIB5 function 0—9 1 6 0 = Not used 6-18(terminal 15) 1 = Ext. fault, closing contact
2 = External fault, opening contact3 = Run enable4 = Acc./dec. time selection5 = Reverse6 = Jog speed7 = Fault reset8 = Acc./dec. operation prohibit9 = DC-braking command
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 272: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-9Pump and fan control Application
6
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
2. 14 Motor(digital) 0.1—2000.0 0.1 10.0 6-19potentiometer ramp time Hz/s Hz/s Hz/s
2. 15 PI-controller reference 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 619signal (source A) 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)
2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r2)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 unit is stopped
2. 16 PI-controller actual 0—3 1 0 0 = Actual value1 6-19value selection 1 = Actual 1 + Actual 2
2 = Actual 1 - Actual 23 = Actual 1 * Actual 2
2. 17 Actual value 1 input 0—2 1 2 0 = No 6-191 = Voltage input2 = Current input
2. 18 Actual value 2 input 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-191 = Voltage input2 = Current input
2. 19 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 6-19min scale +320.00%
2. 20 Actual value 1 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 6-19max scale +320.00%
2. 21 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 0.00% 0% = no minimum scaling 6-19min scale +320.00%
2. 22 Actual value 2 -320.00%— 0.01% 100.00% 100% = no maximum scaling 6-19max scale +320.00%
2. 23 Error value inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-201 = Yes
2. 24 PI-controller reference 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Time for reference value change 6-20value rise time from 0 % to 100 %
2. 25 PI-controller reference 0.0—100.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Time for reference value change 6-20value fall time from 100 % to 0 %
2. 26 Direct frequency 0—4 1 0 0 = Analog voltage input (term. 2) 6-20reference, source B 1 = Analog current input (term. 4)
2 = Set reference from the panel (reference r1)3 = Signal from internal motor pot.4 = Signal from internal motor pot. reset if HV9000 unit is stopped
2. 27 Source B reference 0—par.2. 28 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that corres- 6-20scaling minimum value ponds to the min. reference signal
2. 28 Source B reference 0—fmax 1 Hz 0 Hz Selects the frequency that 6-20scaling maximum value corresponds to the max.
reference signal0 = Scaling off>0 = Scaled maximum value
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 273: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
Page 6-10 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Group 3, Output and supervision parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 1 Analog output function 0—15 1 1 0 = Not used Scale 100% 6-211 = O/P frequency(0—fmax)2 = Motor speed (0—max. speed)3 = O/P current (0—2.0 x InHV9)4 = Motor torque (0—2 x TnMot)5 = Motor power (0—2 x PnMot)6 = Motor voltage (0—100% xVnMot)7 = DC-link volt. (0—1000 V)8—10 = Not in use11 = PI-controller reference value12 = PI-controller actual value 113 = PI-controller actual value 214 = PI-controller error value15 = PI-controller output
3. 2 Analog output filter time 0.00—10.00 s 0.01s 1.00s 6-21
3. 3 Analog output inversion 0—1 1 0 0 = Not inverted 6-211 = Inverted
3. 4 Analog output minimum 0—1 1 0 0 = 0 mA 6-211 = 4 mA
3. 5 Analog output scale 10—1000% 1% 100% 6-21
3. 6 Digital output function 0—30 1 1 0 = Not used 6-221 = Ready2 = Run3 = Fault4 = Fault inverted5 = HV9000 overheat warning6 = External fault or warning7 = Reference fault or warning8 = Warning9 = Reversed10 = Jog speed selected11 = At speed12 = Motor regulator activated13 = Output freq. limit superv. 114 = Output freq. limit superv. 215 = Torque limit supervision16 = Reference limit supervision17 = External brake control18 = Control from I/O terminals19 = Drive temperature limit
supervision20 = Unrequested rotation direction21 = External brake control inverted22—27 = Not in use28 = Auxiliary drive 1 start29 = Auxiliary drive 2 start30 = Auxiliary drive 3 start
3. 7 Relay output 1 function 0—30 1 28 As parameter 3. 6 6-22
3. 8 Relay output 2 function 0—30 1 3 As parameter 3. 6 6-22
3. 9 Output freq. limit 1 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-22supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 10 Output freq. limit 1 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-22supervision value (par. 1. 2)
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 274: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-11Pump and fan control Application
6
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
3. 11 Output freq. limit 2 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-22supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 12 Output freq. limit 2 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-22supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 13 Torque limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 14 Torque limit 0.0—200.0% 0.1% 100.0% 6-23supervision value xTnHV9
3. 15 Active reference limit 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-23supervision function 1 = Low limit
2 = High limit
3. 16 Active reference limit 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-23supervision value (par. 1. 2)
3. 17 External brake off-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 0.5 s 6-23
3. 18 External brake on-delay 0.0—100.0 s 1 1.5 s 6-23
3. 19 Drive 0—2 1 0 0 = No 6-23temperature limit 1 = Low limitsupervision function 2 = High limit
3. 20 Drive -10—+75°C 1 +40°C 6-23temperature limit
3. 21 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—7 1 3 See parameter 3. 1 6-21analog output content
3. 22 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0.00—10.00 s 0.01 1.00 s See parameter 3. 2 6-21analog output filter time
3. 23 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 3 6-21analog output inversion
3. 24 I/O-expander board (opt.) 0—1 1 0 See parameter 3. 4 6-21analog output minimum
3. 25 I/O-expander board (opt.) 10—1000% 1 100% See parameter 3. 5 6-21analog output scale
Group 4, Drive control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 1 Acc./dec. ramp 1 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 6-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 2 Acc./dec. ramp 2 shape 0.0—10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s 0 = Linear 6-24>0 = S-curve acc./dec. time
4. 3 Acceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 6-25
4. 4 Deceleration time 2 0.1—3000.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s 6-25
4. 5 Brake chopper 0—2 1 0 0 = Brake chopper not in use 6-251 = Brake chopper in use2 = External brake chopper
4. 6 Start function 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 6-251 = Flying start
4. 7 Stop function 0—1 1 0 0 = Coasting 6-251 = Ramp
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
![Page 275: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
Page 6-12 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
4. 8 DC-braking current 0.15—1.5 x 0.1 A 0.5 x 6-25InHV9 (A) InHV9
4. 9 DC-braking time at Stop 0.00-250.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Stop 6-25
4. 10 Turn on frequency of DC- 0.1-10.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 1.5 Hz 6-27brake during ramp Stop
4. 11 DC-brake time at Start 0.00-25.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s 0 = DC-brake is off at Start 6-27
4. 12 Jog speed reference fmin —fmax 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz 6-27(1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 5, Prohibit frequency parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
5. 1 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-27range 1 low limit par. 5. 2
5. 2 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = No prohibit frequency range 6-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 3 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-27range 2 low limit par. 5. 4
5. 4 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = No prohibit frequency range 6-27range 2 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
5. 5 Prohibit frequency fmin— 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-27range 3 low limit par. 5. 6
5. 6 Prohibit frequency fmin—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 = No prohibit frequency range 6-27range 3 high limit (1. 1) (1. 2)
Group 6, Motor control parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
6. 1 Motor control mode 0—1 1 0 0 = Frequency control 6-271 = Speed control
6. 2 Switching frequency 1.0—16.0 kHz 0.1 kHz 10/3.6kHz Depends on Hp rating 6-28
6. 3 Field weakening point 30—500 Hz 1 Hz Param. 6-28 1. 11
6. 4 Voltage at field 15—200% 1% 100% 6-28weakening point x Vnmot
6. 5 V/Hz curve mid 0.0—fmax 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 6-28point frequency
6. 6 V/Hz curve mid 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% Parameter maximum value = 6-28point voltage x Vnmot param. 6.4
6. 7 Output voltage at 0.00—100.00% 0.01% 0.00% 6-28zero frequency x Vnmot
6. 8 Overvoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 6-291 = Controller is in operation
6. 9 Undervoltage controller 0—1 1 1 0 = Controller is not operating 6-291 = Controller is in operation
Note! STOPO = Parameter value can be changed only when the drive is stopped.
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
STOPO
![Page 276: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-13Pump and fan control Application
6
Group 7, Protections
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
7. 1 Response to 0—3 1 0 0 = No action 6-29reference fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according topar 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 2 Response to 0—3 1 2 0 = No action 6-29external fault 1 = Warning
2 = Fault, stop according topar 4.7
3 = Fault, always coasting stop
7. 3 Phase supervision of 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 6-29the motor 2 = Fault
7. 4 Ground protection 0—2 2 2 0 = No action 6-292 = Fault
7. 5 Motor thermal protection 0—2 1 2 0 = No action 6-301 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 6 Motor thermal protection 50.0—150.0 % 1.0 % 100.0% 6-30break point current x InMOTOR
7. 7 Motor thermal protection 5.0—150.0% 1.0 % 45.0% 6-31zero frequency current x InMOTOR
7. 8 Motor thermal protection 0.5—300.0 0.5 17.0 Default value is set according 6-31time constant minutes min. min. to motor nominal current
7. 9 Motor thermal protection 10—500 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz 6-32break point frequency
7. 10 Stall protection 0—2 1 1 0 = No action 6-321 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 11 Stall current limit 5.0—200.0% 1.0% 130.0% 6-33x InMOTOR
7. 12 Stall time 2.0—120.0 s 1.0 s 15.0 s 6-33
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency 1—fmax 1 Hz 25 Hz 6-33
7. 14 Underload protection 0—2 1 0 0 = No action 6-341 = Warning2 = Fault
7. 15 Underload prot., field 10.0—150.0 % 1.0% 50.0% 6-34weakening area load x TnMOTOR
7. 16 Underload protection, 5.0—150.0% 1.0% 10.0% 6-34zero frequency load x TnMOTOR
7. 17 Underload time 2.0—600.0 s 1.0 s 20.0 s 6-34
![Page 277: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
Page 6-14 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Group 8, Autorestart parameters
Code Parameter Range Step Default Custom Description Page
8. 1 Automatic restart: 0—10 1 0 0 = Not in use 6-35number of tries
8. 2 Automatic restart:multi 1—6000 s 1 s 30 s 6-35attempt maximum trial time
8. 3 Automatic restart: 0—1 1 0 0 = Ramp 6-36start function 1 = Flying start
8. 4 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-36undervoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 5 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-36overvoltage trip 1 = Yes
8. 6 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-36overcurrent trip 1 = Yes
8. 7 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-36reference fault trip 1 = Yes
8. 8 Automatic restart after 0—1 1 0 0 = No 6-36over/undertemperature 1 = Yesfault trip
![Page 278: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-15Pump and fan control Application
6
Group 9, Pump and fan control special parameters
Code Parameter Range Stepl Default Custom Description Page
9. 1 Number of aux. drives 0—3 1 1 6-37
9. 2 Start frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 51.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 1
9. 3 Stop frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 1
9. 4 Start frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 51.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 2
9. 5 Stop frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 2
9. 6 Start frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 51.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 3
9. 7 Stop frequency of Imin—Imax 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz 6-37auxiliary drive 3
9. 8
9. 9
9. 10 Start delay of the 0.0—300.0 s 0.1 s 4.0 s 6-37auxiliary drives
9. 11 Stop delay of the 0.0—300.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s 6-37auxiliary drives
9. 12 Reference step after 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % In % of actual value 6-38start of the 1 aux. drive
9. 13 Reference step after 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % In % of actual value 6-38start of the 2 aux. drive
9. 14 Reference step after 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % In % of actual value 6-38start of the 3 aux. drive
9. 15 (Reserved)
9. 16 Sleep level 0.0—120/500 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz Frequency below which the freq. 6-38Hz of the speed controlled motor has
go before starting the sleep delaycounting ( 0.0 = not in use)
9. 17 Sleep delay 0.0—3000.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s Time that freq. has to be below par. 6-389.16 before stopping the HV9000
9. 18 Wake up level 0.0—100.0 % 0.1 % 0.0 % Level of the actual value for 6-38restarting the HV9000
9. 19 Wake up function 0—1 1 0 0 =Wake up when falling below 6-38 the wake up level1 = Wake up when exeeding the wake up level
9. 20 PI-regulator bypass 0—1 1 0 1 = PI-regulator bypassed 6-39
Table 6.5-1 Special parameters, Groups 2—9.
![Page 279: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
Page 6-16 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6.5.2 Description of Groups 2—9 parameters
2. 1 DIA2 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse only
one of them is required forreverse
6: Jog freq. contact closed = Jog frequency selected for freq. refer.
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration untiloperation the contact is openedprohibited
9: DC-braking contact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operatescommand until the contact is opened, see figure 6.5-1.
DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
10: Motor (digital) contact closed = Reference increases until the contact is pot. UP opened
t
UD009K32
Param. 4. 10
DIA3
t
UD009K32
DIA3
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Ramp
DIA3 as DC-brake command input and stop-mode = Coasting
Figure 6.5-1 DIA3 as DC-brake command input:a) Stop-mode = ramp,b) Stop-mode = coasting
![Page 280: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-17Pump and fan control Application
6
2. 2 DIA3 function
Selections are same as in 2. 1 except :
10: Motor (digital) contact closed = Reference decreases until the contact ispot. DOWN opened
2. 3 Vin signal range
0 = Signal range 0—10 V1 = Custom setting range from custom minimum (par. 2. 4) to custom
maximum (par. 2. 5)
2. 4-2. 5 Vin custom setting minimum/maximum
These parameters set Vin for any input signal span within 0—10 V.
Minimum setting: Set the Vin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 4,press the Enter button
Maximum setting: Set the Vin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 5,press the Enter button
Note! The parameter values can only be set with this procedure (not with arrow up/arrowdown buttons)
2. 6 Vin signal inversion
0 = no inversion of analog Vin signal
1 = inversion of analog Vin signal.
2. 7 Vin signal filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Vin signal. Along filtering time makes thedrive response slower. Seefigure 6.5-2.
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 7
t [s]
UD009K15
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 6.5-2 Vin signal filtering
![Page 281: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
Page 6-18 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
2. 13 DIA5 function
1: External fault, closing contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is active
2: External fault, opening contact = Fault is shown and motor is stopped when the input is not active
3: Run enable contact open = Start of the motor disabledcontact closed = Start of the motor enabled
4: Acc. / Dec contact open = Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 selectedtime select. contact closed = Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 selected
5: Reverse contact open = Forward If two or more inputs arecontact closed = Reverse programmed to reverse only
one of them is required forreverse
6: Jog freq. contact closed = Jog frequency selected for freq. refer.
7: Fault reset contact closed = Resets all faults
8: Acc./Dec. contact closed = Stops acceleration and deceleration untiloperation the contact is openedprohibited
9: DC-braking contact closed = In the stop mode, the DC-braking operatescommand until the contact is opened, see figure 6.5-1.
DC-brake current is set with parameter 4. 8.
2. 8 Analog input Iin signal range
0 = 0—20 mA1 = 4—20 mA2 = Custom signal span
2. 9 Analog input Iin custom setting2. 10 minimum/maximum
With these parameters you can scale the input current signal (Iin) signal range between0—20 mA.
Minimum setting: Set the Iin signal to its minimum level, select parameter 2. 9, pressthe Enter button
Maximum setting: Set the Iin signal to its maximum level, select parameter 2. 10, pressthe Enter button
Note! The parameter values can only beset with this procedure (not with thearrow up/arrow down buttons)
2. 11 Analog input Iin inversion
0 = no inversion of Iin input.1 = inversion of Iin input.
2. 12 Analog input Iin filter time
Filters out disturbances from theincoming analog Iin signal. A longfiltering time makes the driveresponse slower. See figure 6.5-3.
%
100%
63%
Par. 2. 12
t [s]
UD009K30
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
Figure 6.5-3 Analog input Iin filter time
![Page 282: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-19Pump and fan control Application
6
2. 14 Motor potentiometer ramp time
Defines how fast the electronic motor (digital) potentiometer value changes.
2. 15 PI-controller reference signal
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference trom terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF).
Reference r2 is the PI-controller reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.
- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 3.
4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimumfrequency (par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped. When the value ofparameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2.1 is automaticallyset to 4 and the value of parameter 2. 2 is automatically set to 10.
2. 16 PI-controller actual value selection2. 17 Actual value 12. 18 Actual value 2
These parameters select the PI-controller actual value.
2. 19 Actual value 1 minimum scale
Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 6.5-4.
2. 20 Actual value 1 maximum scale
Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 1. See figure 6.5-4.
2. 21 Actual value 2 minimum scale
Sets the minimum scaling point for Actual value 2.
2. 22 Actual value 2 maximum scale
Sets the maximum scaling point for Actual value 2.
2. 23 Error value inversion
This parameter allows you to invert the error value of the PI-controller (and thus thethe operation of the PI-controller).
0
Par. 2. 19 = -30%Par. 2. 20 = 140%
100
C h012 K 34
100 140-30
004
100
0
Par. 2. 19 = 30%Par. 2. 20 = 80%
1008030
10.0 V20.0 mA20.0 mA
76.5(15.3 mA)
17.7(3.5 mA)
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
Scaledinput signal [%]
Analoginput [%]
004
10.0 V8.03.020.0 mA16.06.0
16.88.8 20.0 mA
Figure 6.5-4 Examples about the scaling of actual value signal.
![Page 283: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
Page 6-20 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
2. 24 PI-controller minimum limit2. 25 PI-controller maximum limit
These parameters set the minmum and maximum values of the PI-controller output.
Parameter value limits: par 1.1 <par. 2. 24 <par. 2. 25.
2. 26 Direct frequency reference, Place B
0 Analog voltage reference from terminals 2—3, e.g. a potentiometer1 Analog current reference from terminals 4—5, e.g. a transducer.2 Panel reference is the reference set from the Reference Page (REF),
Reference r1 is the Place B reference, see chapter 6.3 Reference value is changed with digital input signals DIA2 and DIA3.
- switch in DIA2 closed = frequency reference increases- switch in DIA3 closed = frequency reference decreasesSpeed of the reference change can be set with the parameter 2. 3.
4 Same as setting 3 but the reference value is set to the minimumfrequency (par. 1. 1) each time the drive is stopped.When the value of parameter 1. 5 is set to 3 or 4, the value of parameter 2.1is automatically set to 4 and the value of parameter 2. 2 isautomatically set to 10.
2. 27 2. 28 Place B reference scaling, minimum value/maximum value
Setting limits: 0 < par. 2. 27 < par. 2. 28 < par. 1. 2. If par. 2. 28 = 0 scaling is setoff. See figures 6.5-5 and 6.5-6.
(In the figures below the voltage input Vin with signal range 0—10 V is selected for source Breference)
100
Par. 2. 28
Par. 2. 27
Ch012K35
100
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
M ax freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
Outputfrequency
Analoginput [V]
Max freq. par 1. 2
Min freq. par 1. 1
[Hz][Hz]
Figure 6.5-5 Reference scaling. Figure 6.5-6 Reference scaling, par. 2. 15 = 0
![Page 284: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-21Pump and fan control Application
6
%
100%
63%
Par. 3. 2
t [s]
UD009K16
Filtered signal
Unfiltered signal
3. 1 Analog output function
See table on page 6-10.
3. 2 Analog output filter time
Filters the analog output signal.See figure 6.5-7.
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
12 mA
Ch012K17
Analogoutputcurrent
Selected (para. 3. 1)signal max. value
1.00
20 mA
4 mA
10 mA
0.50 mA
Param. 3. 5= 200%
Param. 3. 5= 100%
Param. 3. 5= 50%
Par. 3. 4 = 1
Par. 3. 4 = 0
Ch012K18
12 mA
Analogoutputcurrent
Max. value of signalselected by param. 3. 1
Figure 6.5-9 Analog output scale.
Figure 6.5-8 Analog output invert
Figure 6.5-7 Analog output filtering.
3.3 Analog output invert
Inverts analog output signal:max output signal = minimum set valuemin output signal = maximum set value
3. 4 Analog output minimum
Defines the signal minimum tobe either 0 mA or 4 mA. Seefigure 6.5-9.
3. 5 Analog output scale
Scaling factor for analog output.See figure 6.5-9.
Signal Max. value of the signal
Output freq. Max. frequency (p. 1. 2)Motor speed Max. speed (nnxfmax/fn)Output 2 x InHV9currentMotor torque 2 x TnMotMotor power 2 x PnMotMotor voltage 100% x VnMotDC-link volt. 1000 VPI-ref. value 100% x ref. value max.PI-act. value1 100% x act. value max.PI-act. value2 100% x act. value max.PI-error value 100%x error value max.PI-output 100% x output max.
![Page 285: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
Page 6-22 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
3. 6 Digital output function3. 7 Relay output 1 function3. 8 Relay output 2 function
Setting value Signal content
0 = Not used Out of operation
Digital output DO1 sinks current and programmablerelay (RO1, RO2) is activated when:
1 = Ready The drive is ready to operate2 = Run The drive operates (motor is running)3 = Fault A fault trip has occurred4 = Fault inverted A fault trip has not occurred5 = HV9000 overheat warning The heat-sink temperature exceeds +70°C6 = External fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 27 = Reference fault or warning Fault or warning depending on parameter 7. 1
- if analog reference is 4—20 mA and signal is <4mA8 = Warning If a warning exists. See Table 7.10-1 in User's Manual9 = Reversed The reverse command has been selected10= Multi-step or jog speed Multi-step or jog speed has been selected by digital inp.11 = At speed The output frequency has reached the set reference12= Motor regulator activated Overvoltage or overcurrent regulator was activated13= Output frequency supervision 1 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 9 and par. 3. 10)14= Output frequency supervision 2 The output frequency goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 11 and par. 3. 12)15= Torque limit supervision The motor torque goes outside of the set supervision
Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 13 and par. 3. 14)16= Active reference Active reference goes outside of the set supervision
limit supervision Low limit/ High limit (par. 3. 15 and par. 3. 16)17= External brake control External brake ON/OFF control with programmable
delay (par 3. 17 and 3. 18)18= Control from I/O terminals External control mode selected with progr. pushbutton#219= Drive temperature limit Temperature on drive goes outside the
supervision set supervision limits (par. 3. 19 and 3. 20)20= Unrequested rotation direction Rotation direction of the motor shaft is different from the
requested one21 = External brake control inverted External brake ON/OFF control (par. 3.17 and 3.18).
Output active when brake control is ON22—27 = Not in use28 = Auxiliary drive 1 start Starts and stops auxiliary drive 129 = Auxiliary drive 2start Starts and stops auxiliary drive 230 = Auxiliary drive 3 start Starts and stops auxilary drive 3
Table 6.5-2 Output signals via DO1 and output relays RO1 and RO2.
3. 9 Output frequency limit 1, supervision function3. 11 Output frequency limit 2, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the output frequency goes under/over the set limit (3. 10, 3. 12) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of the parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 10 Output frequency limit 1, supervision value3. 12 Output frequency limit 2, supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 9 (3. 11). See figure6.5-10.
![Page 286: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-23Pump and fan control Application
6
3. 13 Torque limit , supervisionfunction
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the calculated torque value goesunder/over the set limit (3. 14) thisfunction generates a warningmessage via the digital output DO1or via a relay output RO1 or RO2depending on the settings ofparameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 14 Torque limit , supervision value
The calculated torque value to be supervised by parameter 3. 13.
3. 15 Active reference limit, supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the reference value goes under/over the set limit (3. 16) this function generates awarning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1 orRO2 depending on the settings of parameters 3. 6—3. 8. The supervised referenceis the current active reference. It can be source A or B reference depending on DIB6input or panel reference if the panel is the active control source.
3. 16 Active reference limit , supervision value
The frequency value to be supervised by the parameter 3. 15.
3. 17 External brake-off delay3. 18 External brake-on delay
The function of the external brake can be delayed from the start and stop controlsignals with these parameters. See figure 6.5-11.
The brake control signal can be programmed via the digital output DO1 or via one ofrelay outputs RO1 and RO2, see parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 19 Drive temperature limit supervision function
0 = No supervision1 = Low limit supervision2 = High limit supervision
If the temperature of the drive goes under/over the set limit (3. 20) this functiongenerates a warning message via the digital output DO1 or via a relay output RO1or RO2 depending on the settings of parameters 3. 6—3. 8.
3. 20 Drive temperature limit value
The temperature value to be supervised by parameter 3. 19.
Par 3. 10
f[Hz]
t
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
21 RO122 RO1 23 RO1
UD009K19
Example:
Par. 3.9 = 2
Figure 6.5-10 Output frequency supervision.
![Page 287: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
Page 6-24 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
tOFF = Par. 3. 17 tON = Par. 3. 18
t
a)
t
b)
UD012K45
DIA1: RUN FWD
STOP
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: RUN REV
STOP
DIA1: START
PULSE
External
BRAKE: OFF
ONDigital orrelay output
DIA2: STOP
PULSE
4. 1 Acc/Dec ramp 1 shape4. 2 Acc/Dec ramp 2 shape
The acceleration and deceleration ramp shape can be programmed with theseparameters.
Setting the value = 0 gives you a linear ramp shape. The output frequency immediatelyfollows the input with a ramp time set by parameters 1. 3, 1. 4 (4. 3, 4. 4 for Acc/Dectime 2).
[Hz]
[t]
4. 1 (4. 2)
4. 1 (4. 2)
UD009K20
1. 3, 1. 4(4. 3, 4. 4)
Setting 0.1—10 seconds for 4. 1 (4.2) causes an S-shaped ramp. Thespeed changes are smooth.Parameter 1. 3/ 1. 4 (4. 3/ 4. 4)determines the ramp time of theacceleration/deceleration in themiddle of the curve. See figure 6.5-12.
Figure 6.5-11 External brake control: a) Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 0, 1 or 2b)Start/Stop logic selection par. 2. 1 = 3.
Figure 6.5-12 S-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
![Page 288: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-25Pump and fan control Application
6
4. 3 Acceleration time 24. 4 Deceleration time 2
These values correspond to the time required for the output frequency to acceleratefrom the set minimum frequency (par. 1. 1) to the set maximum frequency (par. 1.2). With this parameter it is possibile to set two different acceleration/decelerationtimes for one application. The active set can be selected with programmable signalDIA3 of this application. See parameter 2. 2. Acceleration/deceleration times can bereduced with a external free analog input signal. See parameters 2. 18 and 2. 19.
4. 5 Brake chopper
0 = No brake chopper1 = Brake chopper and brake resistor installed2 = External brake chopper
When the drive is decelerating the motor, the energy stored in the inertia of the motorand the load is fed into the external brake resistor. If the brake resistor is selectedcorrectly the drive is able to decelerate the load with a torque equal to that ofacceleration. See the separate Brake resistor installation manual.
4. 6 Start function
Ramp:
0 The drive starts from 0 Hz and accelerates to the set reference frequency withinthe set acceleration time. (Load inertia or starting friction may cause prolongedacceleration times).
Flying start:
1 The drive starts into a running motor by first finding the speed the motor isrunning at. Searching starts from the maximum frequency down until the actualfrequency reached. The output frequency then accelerates/decelerates to theset reference value at a rate determined by the acceleration/deceleration rampparameters.
Use this mode if the motor may be coasting when the start command is given.With the flying start it is possible to ride through short utility voltage interruptions.
4. 7 Stop function
Coasting:
0 The motor coasts to an uncontrolled stop with the HV9000 off, after the Stopcommand.
Ramp:
1 After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is decelerated according tothe deceleration ramp time parameter. If the regenerated energy is high it maybe necessary to use an external braking resistor for faster deceleration.
4. 8 DC braking current
Defines the current injected into the motor during the DC braking.
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
4. 9 DC braking time at stop
Determines whether DC braking is ON or OFF. It also determines the braking durationtime of the DC-brake when the motor is stopping. The function of the DC-brakedepends on the stop function, parameter 4. 7. See figure 6.5-13.
![Page 289: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
Page 6-26 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
0 DC-brake is not used
>0 DC-brake is in use depending on the setup of the stop function (param. 4.7). The time is set by the value of parameter 4. 9:
Stop-function = 0 (coasting):
After the stop command, the motor will coast to a stop with the HV9000 off.
With DC-injection, the motor can be electrically stopped in the shortestpossible time, without using an optional external braking resistor.
The braking time is scaled according to the frequency when the DC- brakingstarts. If the frequency is > nominal frequency of the motor (par. 1.11), thevalue of parameter 4.9 determines the braking time. When the frequency is< 10% of the nominal, the braking time is 10% of the set value of parameter4.9.
0,1x fn
t = param. 4. 9
t
Param. 4. 10
fout
UD009K23
Motor speed
Output frequency
DC-braking
RUNSTOP
Stop-function = 1 (ramp):
After the Stop command, the speed of the motor is reduced baed on thedeceleration ramp parameter, if no regeneration occurs due to load inertia, to aspeed defined with by parameter 4. 10, where the DC-braking starts.
The braking time is defined with parameter 4. 9.
If high inertia exists, it is recommended to use an external braking resistor forfaster deceleration. See figure 6.5-14.
fout fout
fn fn
t t
t = 1 x par. 4. 9 t = 0.1 x par. 4. 9
UD009K21RUNSTOP
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
Motor speed
Output frequency
Motor speed
DC-braking ON
DC-braking ON
Figure 6.5-13 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 0.
4. 10 Execute frequency of DC-brake during ramp Stop
See figure 6.5-14.
[Hz] [Hz]
[Hz]
Figure 6.5-14 DC-braking time when par. 4. 7 = 1.
![Page 290: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-27Pump and fan control Application
6
frequencyreference
>0 DC-brake is active when the startcommand is given. Thisparameter defines the time beforethe brake is released. After thebrake is released the outputfrequency increases according tothe set start function parameter 4.6 and acceleration parameters (1.3, 4. 1 or 4. 2, 4. 3), see figure 6.5-15.
4. 12 Jog speed reference
Parameter value defines the jogspeed selected with the digitalinput.
5. 1-5.6 Prohibit frequency area,Low limit/High limit
In some systems it may be nec-essary to avoid certainfrequencies because of mechani-cal resonance problems.
With these parameters it ispossible to set limits for three "skipfrequency" regions. The accuracyof the setting is 0.1 Hz.
4. 11 DC-brake time at start
0 DC-brake is not used
t
UD009K22
Par 4. 11
RUNSTOP
Output frequency
5. 1 5. 25. 3 5. 45. 5 5. 6
[Hz]
[Hz]
UD009K33
fout
6. 1 Motor control mode
0 = Frequency control: The I/O terminal and panel references are frequencyreferences and the drive controls the output frequency (outputfreq. resolution 0.01 Hz)
1 = Speed control: The I/O terminal and panel references are speed referencesand the drive controls the motor speed (control accuracy ±0.5%).
6. 2 Switching frequency
Motor noise can be minimized by using a high switching frequency. Increasing thefrequency reduces the capacity of the HV9000. Before changing the frequency fromthe factory default 10 kHz (3.6 kHz>40Hp), check the drive derating from the curvesin figure 5.2-2 and 5.2-3 of the User's Manual.
fout [Hz]
(V/Hz)
(sensorless vector)
Figure 6.5-16 Example of prohibit frequencyarea setting.
Figure 6.5-15 DC-braking time at start
![Page 291: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
Page 6-28 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6. 3 Field weakening point6. 4 Voltage at the field weakening point
The field weakening point is the output frequency where the output voltage reachesthe set maximum value (par. 6. 4). Above that frequency the output voltage remainsat the set maximum value. Below that frequency output voltage depends on the settingof the V/Hz curve parameters 1. 8, 1. 9, 6. 5, 6. 6 and 6. 7. See figure 6.5-17.
When parameters 1. 10 and 1. 11, nominal voltage and nominal frequency of themotor are set, parameters 6. 3 and 6. 4 are also set automatically to thecorresponding values. If different values for the field weakening point and themaximum output voltage are required, change these parameters after setting theparameters 1. 10 and 1. 11.
6. 5 V/Hz curve, middle point frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with 2. 28parameter 1. 8 thisparameter defines the middle point frequency of the curve. See figure 6.5-17.
6. 6 V/Hz curve, middle point voltage
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the middle point voltage (% of motor nominal voltage) of the curve. See figure6.5-17.
6. 7 Output voltage at zero frequency
If the programmable V/Hz curve has been selected with parameter 1. 8 this parameterdefines the zero frequency voltage of the curve. See figure 6.5-17.
6. 8 Overvoltage controller6. 9 Undervoltage controller
These parameters allow the over/undervoltage controllers to be switched ON orOFF. This may be useful in cases where the utility supply voltage varies more than-15%—+10% and the application requires a constant speed. If the controllers areON, they will change the motor speed in over/undervoltage cases. Overvoltage =faster, undervoltage = slower.
Over/undervoltage trips may occur when controllers are not used.
Parameter 6.5 Parameter 6.3 f[Hz](Default 5 Hz)
U[V]V
n
Parameter6.4
Parameter 6.6Default 10%
Parameter 6.7Default 1.3 %
Figure 6.5-17 Programmable V/Hz curve
Default: Nominalvoltage of the motor
![Page 292: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-29Pump and fan control Application
6
7. 1 Response to the reference fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated if 4—20 mA referencesignal is used and the signal falls below 4 mA. The information can also beprogrammed via digital output DO1 and via relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 2 Response to external fault
0 = No response1 = Warning2 = Fault, stop mode after fault according to parameter 4.73 = Fault, always coasting stop mode after fault
A warning or a fault action and message is generated from the external faultsignal in the digital input DIA3. The information can also be programmed intodigital output DO1 and into relay outputs RO1 and RO2.
7. 3 Phase supervision of the motor
0 = No action2 = Fault
Phase supervision of the motor ensures that the motor phases have approxi-mately equal current.
7. 4 Ground fault protection
0 = No action2 = Fault message
Ground fault protection ensures that the sum of the motor phase currents is zero.The overcurrent protection is always working and protects the drive from groundfaults with high current levels.
Parameters 7. 5—7. 9 Motor thermal protection
General
Motor thermal protection is to protect the motor from overheating. The HV9000drive is capable of supplying higher than nominal current to the motor. If the loadrequires this high current, there is a risk that motor will be thermally overloaded.This is true especially at low frequencies. With low frequencies the cooling effectof the motor fan is reduced and the capacity of the motor is reduced. If the motoris equipped with an external fan, the load reduction on low speed is small.
Motor thermal protection is based on a calculated model and it uses the outputcurrent of the drive to determine the load on the motor. When the power is turnedon to the drive, the calculated model uses the heatsink temperature to determinethe initial thermal state of the motor. The calculated model assumes that the am-bient temperature of the motor is 40°C.
Motor thermal protection can be adjusted by setting several parameters. Thethermal current IT specifies the load current above which the motor is overloaded.This current limit is a function of the output frequency. The curve for IT is set withparameters 7. 6, 7. 7 and 7. 9. See figure 6.5-18. The default values of theseparameters are set from the motor nameplate data.
![Page 293: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
Page 6-30 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
With the output current at IT the thermal state will reach the nominal value (100%).The thermal state changes with the square of the current. With output current at75% of IT the thermal state will reach 56% and with output current at 120% of IT
the thermal state would reach 144%. The function will trip the drive (refer par. 7. 5)if the thermal model reaches a value of 105%. The response time of the thermalmodel is determined by the time constant, parameter 7. 8. The larger the motorthe longer it takes to reach the final temperature.
The thermal state of the motor can be monitored through the display. Refer to thetable for monitoring items. (User's Manual, table 7.3-1).
7. 5 Motor thermal protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is selected, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protectionby setting this parameter to 0, will reset the thermal stageof the motor to 0%.
7. 6 Motor thermal protection, break point current
The current can be set between 50.0—150.0% x InMotor.This parameter sets the value for thermal current at frequencies above the breakpoint on the thermal current curve. See figure 6.5-18.
The value is set as a percentage of the motor nameplate nominal current, parameter1. 13, nominal current of the motor, not the drive's nominal output current.
The motor's nominal current is the current which the motor can withstand in directon-line use without being overheated.
If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automatically restored to its defaultvalue.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect the maximum outputcurrent of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.
7. 7 Motor thermal protection, zero frequency current
The current can be set between 10.0—150.0% x InMotor. This parameter sets thevalue for thermal current at zero frequency. See figure 6.5-18.
The default value is set assuming that there is no external fan cooling the motor. If anexternal fan is used this parameter can be set to 90% (or higher).
The value is set as a percentage of the motor's nameplate nominal current,parameter 1. 13, not the drive's nominal output current. The motor's nominal
!CAUTION! The calculated model does not protect the motor if the cooling of
the motor is reduced either by blocking the airflow or due to dust ordirt.
![Page 294: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-31Pump and fan control Application
6
Par. 7. 6
Par. 7. 7
IT
f
par. 1. 7
I
UMCH7_91Par. 7. 9
Overload area
Currentlimit
current is the current which the motor can stand in direct on-line use without be-ing overheated.
If you change parameter 1. 13, this parameter is automatically restored to thedefault value.
Setting this parameter (or parameter 1. 13) does not affect to the maximum out-put current of the drive. Parameter 1. 7 alone determines the maximum outputcurrent of the drive.
7. 8 Motor thermal protection, time constant
The time can be set between 0.5—300 minutes.This is the thermal time constant ofthe motor. The larger the motor the greater the time constant. The time constant isdefined as the time it takes the calculated thermal stage to reach 63% of its finalvalue.
The motor thermal time is specific to a motor design and it varies between differentmotor manufacturers.
The default value for the time constant is calculated based on the motor nameplatedata from parameters 1. 12 and 1. 13. If either of these parameters is reset, thenthis parameter is set to its default value.
If the motor's t6 -time is known (given by the motor manufacturer) the time constantparameter could be set based on t6 -time. As a rule of thumb, the motor thermaltime constant in minutes equals to 2xt6 (t6 in seconds is the time a motor can safelyoperate at six times the rated current). If the drive is in stopped, the time constant isinternally increased to three times the set parameter value. The cooling in the stopstage is based on convection with an increased time constant.
Figure 6.5-18 Motor thermal current IT curve.
[Hz]
![Page 295: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
Page 6-32 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
105%
par. 7. 5
Θ = (I/IT)2 x (1-e-t/T)
I/IT
UMCH7_92
Trip area
Motor temperature
TimeMotor temperature
Time constant T*)
*) Changed with motor size and adjusted with parameter 7. 8
Trip/warningMotorcurrent
7. 9 Motor thermal protection, break point frequency
The frequency can be set between 10—500 Hz.This is the frequency break point ofthermal current curve. With frequencies above this point the thermal capacity of themotor is assumed to be constant. See figure 6.5-18.
The default value is based on motor's nameplate data, parameter 1. 11. It is 35 Hzfor a 50 Hz motor and 42 Hz for a 60 Hz motor. More generally it is 70% of the frequencyat the field weakening point (parameter 6. 3). Changing either parameter 1. 11 or 6.3 will restore this parameter to its default value.
Parameters 7. 10— 7. 13, Stall protectionGeneral
Motor stall protection protects the motor from short time overload situations like astalled shaft. The reaction time of stall protection can be set shorter than with motorthermal protection. The stall state is defined with two parameters, 7.11. Stall Currentand 7.13. Stall Frequency. If the current is higher than the set limit and outputfrequency is lower than the set limit, the stall state is true. There is actually no realindication of the shaft rotation. Stall protection is a type of overcurrent protection.
7. 10 Stall protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Trip function
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set on, the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Setting this parameter to 0 will deactivate the protection and will reset the stall timecounter to zero.
Figure 6.5-19 Calculating motor temperature
![Page 296: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-33Pump and fan control Application
6
f
I
Par. 7. 11
Par. 7. 13 UMCH7_11
Stall area
7. 12 Stall time
The time can be set between 2.0—120 s.This is the maximum allowed time for a stall. There is an internal up/down counterto count the stall time. See figure 6.5-21. If the stall time counter value goes abovethis limit the protection will cause a trip (refer to the parameter 7. 10).
Par. 7. 12
UMCH7_12
Trip area
Time
Stall time counter
StallNo stall
Trip/warningpar. 7. 10
7. 11 Stall current limit
The current can be set between0.0—200% x InMotor.
In a stall the current has to beabove this limit. See figure6.5-20. The value is set as apercentage of the motor's name-plate nominal current, parameter1.13. If parameter 1.13 isadjusted, this parameter isautomatically restored to itsdefault value.
7. 13 Maximum stall frequency
The frequency can be set between1—fmax (par. 1. 2).In the stall state, the outputfrequency has to be smaller thanthis limit. See figure 6.5-20.
Parameters 7. 14— 7. 17, Underload protectionGeneral
The purpose of motor underload protection is to ensure that there is load on the motorwhile the drive is running. If the motor load is reduced, there might be a problem inthe process, e.g. broken belt or dry pump.
Motor underload protection can be adjusted by setting the underload curve withparameters 7. 15 and 7. 16. The underload curve is a squared curve set betweenzero frequency and the field weakening point. The protection is not active below5Hz (the underload counter value is stopped). See figure 6.5-22.
[Hz]
Figure 6.5-20 Setting the stall characteristics.
Figure 6.5-21 Counting the stall time.
![Page 297: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
Page 6-34 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
The torque values for setting the underload curve are set with percentage valueswhich refer to the nominal torque of the motor. The motor's nameplate data,parameter 1. 13, the motor's nominal current and the drive's nominal current ICTare used to find the scaling ratio for the internal torque value. If other thanstandard motor is used with the drive, the accuracy of the torque calculation isdecreased.
7. 14 Underload protection
Operation:
0 = Not in use1 = Warning2 = Fault
Tripping and warning will give a display indication with the same message code. Iftripping is set active the drive will stop and activate the fault stage.
Deactivating the protection, by setting this parameter to 0, will reset the underloadtime counter to zero.
7. 15 Underload protection, fieldweakening area load
The torque limit can be setbetween 20.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value forthe minimum allowed torquewhen the output frequency isabove the field weakening point.See the figure 6.5-22. Ifparameter 1. 13 is adjusted, thisparameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 16 Underload protection, zero frequency load
Torque limit can be set between 10.0—150 % x TnMotor.
This parameter is the value for the minimum allowed torque with zero frequency.See figure 6.5-22. If parameter 1. 13 is adjusted, this parameter is automaticallyrestored to its default value.
7. 17 Underload time
This time can be set between 2.0—600.0 s.
This is the maximum allowed time for an underload state. There is an internal up/down counter to accumulate the underload time. See figure 6.5-23. If the underloadcounter value goes above this limit, the protection will cause a trip (refer to theparameter 7. 14). If the drive is stopped the underload counter is reset to zero.
Par. 7. 15
ChCH7_15
Par. 7. 16
f5 Hz
Underload area
Torque
Field weakeningpoint par. 6. 3
f [Hz]
Figure 6.5-22 Setting of minimum load.
![Page 298: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-35Pump and fan control Application
6
8. 1 Automatic restart: number of tries8. 2 Automatic restart: trial time
The Automatic restart function restarts the drive after the faults selected withparameters 8. 4—8. 8. The Start function for Automatic restart is selected withparameter 8. 3.
Parameter 8. 1 determines how many automatic restarts can be made during thetrial time set by the parameter 8. 2.
The time counting starts from the first autorestart. If the number of restarts doesnot exceed the value of parameter 8.1 during the trial time, the counting is clearedafter the trial time has elapsed. The next fault starts the counting again. See figure6.5-2.
Par. 7. 17
UMCH7_17
Trip area
Time
Underload time counter
Underl.No underl.
Trip/warningpar. 7. 14
4
3
2
1
t
UD012K25
Three faults Four faults
RUNSTOP
Number of faultsduring t = ttrial
ttrial ttrial
Par. 8. 1 = 3ttrial = Par. 8. 2
Figure 6.5-23 Counting the underload time.
Figure 6.5-24 Automatic restart.
![Page 299: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
Page 6-36 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
8. 3 Automatic restart, start function
The parameter defines the start mode:
0 = Start with ramp1 = Flying start, see parameter 4. 6.
8. 4 Automatic restart after undervoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after undervoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after undervoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 5 Automatic restart after overvoltage trip
0 = No automatic restart after overvoltage trip1 = Automatic restart after overvoltage fault condition returns to the normal condition (DC-link voltage returns to the normal level)
8. 6 Automatic restart after overcurrent trip
0 = No automatic restart after overcurrent trip1 = Automatic restart after overcurrent faults
8. 7 Automatic restart after reference fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after reference fault trip1 = Automatic restart after analog current reference signal (4—20 mA) returns to the normal level (>4 mA)
8. 8 Automatic restart after over/undertemperature fault trip
0 = No automatic restart after temperature fault trip1 = Automatic restart after heatsink temperature has returned to its normal level between -10°C—+75°C.
![Page 300: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-37Pump and fan control Application
6
Flow
Output frequency
Start freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.2 + 1 Hz)
Frequency after starting the aux. drive1 is par. 9.3 + 1 Hz
Stop freq. of aux. drive 1(par. 9.3 - 1 Hz)
Frequency after starting the aux. drive1is par. 9.3 - 1 Hz
Fminpar. 1.1
Start freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.2 + 1 Hz)
Start delay of the aux. drives (par 9.10)
Frequency increase during the start delay
Stop freq. of aux. drive 1 (par. 9.3 - 1 Hz)
Frequency decrease during the stop delay
Output frequency
Flow
Stop delay of the aux. drives (par 9.11) Fmin
par. 1.1
Output frequency
9. 1 Number of auxiliary drives
With this parameter the number of auxiliary drives in use is defined. The signals tocontrol the auxiliary drives on and off can be programmed to the relay outputs or tothe digital output with parameters 3. 6 - 3. 8. The default setting is one auxiliary drivein use, pre-programmed to relay output RO1.
9. 2 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 19. 4 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 29. 6 Start frequency of auxiliary drive 3
The frequency of the HV9000 must exceed by 1 Hz the limit defined with theseparameters before the auxiliary drive is started. The 1 Hz provides hysteresis to avoidunnecessary starts and stops. See figure 6.5-25.
9. 3 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 19. 5 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 29. 7 Stop frequency of auxiliary drive 3
The frequency of the HV9000 must fall 1Hz below the limit defined with theseparameters before the auxiliary drive is stopped. The stop frequency limit also definesthe frequency the drive drops to after starting the auxiliary drive. See figure 6.5-25.
9. 10 Start delay of auxiliary drives
Starting of the auxiliary drives is delayed based on the time setting of parameter 9.10. This prevents unnecessary starts which could be caused by a flow referencerequest which is momentarily above the previous reference level. See figure 6.5-25.
9. 11 Stop delay of auxiliary drives
Stopping of the auxiliary drives is delayed based on the time setting of parameter 9.10. This prevents unnecessary stops which could be caused by a flow referencerequest which is momentarily below the previous reference level. See figure 6.5-25.
Figure 6.5-25 Example of the effect of parameters in variable speed and one auxiliarydrive system.
[Hz][Hz]
![Page 301: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
Page 6-38 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Time
Reference for PI-controller
Reference(analoginput)
Reference step 1par. 9.12
Reference step 2par. 9.13
Reference step 3par. 9.14
Aux. drive 1
start
stop start
stopAux. drive 2
Aux. drive 3 start
stop
9. 12 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 19. 13 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 29. 14 Reference step after start of the auxiliary drive 3
A reference step will automatically be added to the reference value when thecorresponding auxiliary drive is started. This allows compensation for the pressureloss in the piping caused by the increased flow. See figure 6.5-26.
9. 16 Sleep level9. 17 Sleep delay
Changing this parameter from a value of 0.0 Hz activates the sleep function wherethe drive is stopped automatically when the frequency is below the sleep level (par.9.16) continuously over the sleep delay (9. 17) time. During the stop state the Pumpand fan control logic is operating and will switch the drive to the Run state when thewake up level defined with parameters 9. 18 and 9. 19 is reached. See figure 6.5-27.
9. 18 Wake up level
The wake up level defines the percentage level below which the actual frequencymust fall or which has to be exceeded before starting the drive from the sleep function.See figure 6.5-27.
9. 19 Wake up function
This parameter defines if the wake up occurs when the frequency either falls belowor exceeds the wake up level (par. 9. 18).
Figure 6.5-26 Reference steps after starting and stopping the auxiliary drives.
Reference(analog input)
![Page 302: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-39Pump and fan control Application
6
t < tsleep (param. 9.17)tsleep
Wake up level (param. 9.18 )
Actual value
Output frequency
Sleep levelparam. 9.16
Time
Time
Start/Stop status of the var. speed drive
running
stop
9. 20 PI-regulator bypass
With this parameter the PI-requlator can be programmed to be bypassed. Then thefrequency of the drive is controlled by the frequency reference and the starting pointsof the auxiliary drives are also defined by this reference.
Minimum freq.(par. 1.1)
Minimum of the actual value
Output freq.
Actual value
Maximum of the actual value
Start freq. of the aux. drive 1 (par.9.2)
Max. freq.(par. 1.2)
Stop freq. of the aux. drive 1 (par.9.3)
Stop freq. of the aux. drive 2 (par.9.5)
Start/stop control of the freq. converter
Auxiliary drive 1
stop
start
stop
start
stop
start
Start freq. of the aux. drive 2 (par.9.4)
Auxiliary drive 2
Figure 6.5-28 Example of the function of variable speed drive and two auxiliarydrives when PI-requlator is bypassed with parameter 9. 20.
Figure 6.5-27 Example of the sleep function.
![Page 303: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
Page 6-40 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
6.6 MONITORING DATA
The PI-control application has additional items for monitoring (n20 - n25). See table 6.6-1
Data Data Unit Descriptionnumber name
n 1 Output frequency Hz Frequency to the motor
n 2 Motor speed rpm Calculated motor speed
n 3 Motor current A Measured motor current
n 4 Motor torque % Calculated actual torque/nominal torque of the unit
n 5 Motor power % Calculated actual power/nominal power of the unit
n 6 Motor voltage V Calculated motor voltage
n 7 DC-link voltage V Measured DC-link voltage
n 8 Temperature °C Temperature of the heat sink
n 9 Operating day counter DD.dd Operating days 1, not resettable
n 10 Operating hours, HH.hh Operating hours 2, can be reset with"trip counter" programmable button #3
n 11 MW-hours MWh Total MW-hours, not resettable
n 12 MW-hours, MWh MW-hours, can be reset with programmable"trip counter" button #4
n 13 Voltage/analog input V Voltage of the terminal Vin+ (term. #2)
n 14 Current/analog input mA Current of terminals Iin+ and Iin- (term. #4, #5)
n 15 Digital input status, gr. A
n 16 Digital input status, gr. B
n 17 Digital and relay outputstatus
n 18 Control program Version number of the control software
n 19 Unit nominal power Hp Shows the horsepower size of the unit
n 20 PI-controller reference % Percent of the maximum reference
n 21 PI-controller actual value % Percent of the maximum actual value
n 22 PI-controller error value % Percent of the maximum error value
n 23 PI-controller output Hz
n 24 Number of runningauxiliary drives
n 25 Motor temperature rise % 100%= temperature of motor has risen to nominal
1 DD = full days, dd = decimal part of a day2 HH = full hours, hh = decimal part of an hour
Table 6.6-1 Monitored items.
![Page 304: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
HV9000 Page 6-41Pump and fan control Application
6
6.7 Panel reference
The Pump and fan control application has an extra reference (r2) for PI-controller on the panel'sreference page. See table 6.7-1.
Refrence Reference Range Step Function number name
r1 Frequency fmin—fmax 0.01 Hz Reference for panel control and reference I/O terminal Source B reference.
r2 PI-controller 0—100% 0.1% Reference for PI-controller reference
Table 6.7-1 Panel reference.
![Page 305: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
Page 6-42 HV9000Pump and fan control Application
6
Remarks:
![Page 306: User Manual • HV Ready Application Manual · 2014-11-17 · market. To ensure maximum flexibility, yet meet the EMC needs of different regions, all drives meet the highest immunity](https://reader033.vdocument.in/reader033/viewer/2022050407/5f84a8b6b40bb479bd324065/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
Cutler-Hammer, a part of Eaton Corporation, is a worldwide leader providing customer-driven solutions. From power distribution and electrical control products to industrial automation, Cutler-Hammer utilizes advanced product development, world-class manufacturing, and offers global engineering services and support.
For more information on Cutler-Hammer products and services,call 1-800-525-2000 or 1-616-982-1059, or visit our web site atwww.cutlerhammer.eaton.com
For Cutler-Hammer Adjustable Frequency Drives technicalinformation and support, please call 1-800-322-4986.
Publication No. TD.08H.18.T.EMarch 2000Printed in U.S.A. / GSP 1632
Copyright Cutler-Hammer Inc., 2000All Rights Reserved
Cutler-HammerMilwaukee, Wisconsin U.S.A.
TD
.08H
.18.
T.E
1652 HV9000 Cover 4/18/00 11:17 AM Page 2